postgresql/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c

8542 lines
213 KiB
C
Raw Normal View History

/*--------------------------------------------------------------------
* guc.c
*
* Support for grand unified configuration scheme, including SET
* command, configuration file, and command line options.
* See src/backend/utils/misc/README for more information.
*
*
2011-01-01 19:18:15 +01:00
* Copyright (c) 2000-2011, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Written by Peter Eisentraut <peter_e@gmx.net>.
*
* IDENTIFICATION
2010-09-20 22:08:53 +02:00
* src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "postgres.h"
#include <ctype.h>
#include <float.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <limits.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#ifdef HAVE_SYSLOG
#include <syslog.h>
#endif
#include "access/gin.h"
#include "access/transam.h"
#include "access/twophase.h"
#include "access/xact.h"
#include "catalog/namespace.h"
#include "commands/async.h"
#include "commands/prepare.h"
#include "commands/vacuum.h"
#include "commands/variable.h"
Changes pg_trigger and extend pg_rewrite in order to allow triggers and rules to be defined with different, per session controllable, behaviors for replication purposes. This will allow replication systems like Slony-I and, as has been stated on pgsql-hackers, other products to control the firing mechanism of triggers and rewrite rules without modifying the system catalog directly. The firing mechanisms are controlled by a new superuser-only GUC variable, session_replication_role, together with a change to pg_trigger.tgenabled and a new column pg_rewrite.ev_enabled. Both columns are a single char data type now (tgenabled was a bool before). The possible values in these attributes are: 'O' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "origin" (default) or "local". This is the default behavior. 'D' - Trigger/Rule is disabled and fires never 'A' - Trigger/Rule fires always regardless of the setting of session_replication_role 'R' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "replica" The GUC variable can only be changed as long as the system does not have any cached query plans. This will prevent changing the session role and accidentally executing stored procedures or functions that have plans cached that expand to the wrong query set due to differences in the rule firing semantics. The SQL syntax for changing a triggers/rules firing semantics is ALTER TABLE <tabname> <when> TRIGGER|RULE <name>; <when> ::= ENABLE | ENABLE ALWAYS | ENABLE REPLICA | DISABLE psql's \d command as well as pg_dump are extended in a backward compatible fashion. Jan
2007-03-20 00:38:32 +01:00
#include "commands/trigger.h"
#include "funcapi.h"
#include "libpq/auth.h"
#include "libpq/be-fsstubs.h"
#include "libpq/pqformat.h"
#include "miscadmin.h"
#include "optimizer/cost.h"
#include "optimizer/geqo.h"
#include "optimizer/paths.h"
#include "optimizer/planmain.h"
#include "parser/parse_expr.h"
#include "parser/parse_type.h"
#include "parser/parser.h"
#include "parser/scansup.h"
#include "pgstat.h"
#include "postmaster/autovacuum.h"
#include "postmaster/bgwriter.h"
#include "postmaster/postmaster.h"
#include "postmaster/syslogger.h"
#include "postmaster/walwriter.h"
#include "replication/syncrep.h"
#include "replication/walreceiver.h"
#include "replication/walsender.h"
#include "storage/bufmgr.h"
#include "storage/standby.h"
#include "storage/fd.h"
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
#include "storage/predicate.h"
#include "tcop/tcopprot.h"
#include "tsearch/ts_cache.h"
#include "utils/builtins.h"
#include "utils/bytea.h"
#include "utils/guc_tables.h"
#include "utils/memutils.h"
#include "utils/pg_locale.h"
Changes pg_trigger and extend pg_rewrite in order to allow triggers and rules to be defined with different, per session controllable, behaviors for replication purposes. This will allow replication systems like Slony-I and, as has been stated on pgsql-hackers, other products to control the firing mechanism of triggers and rewrite rules without modifying the system catalog directly. The firing mechanisms are controlled by a new superuser-only GUC variable, session_replication_role, together with a change to pg_trigger.tgenabled and a new column pg_rewrite.ev_enabled. Both columns are a single char data type now (tgenabled was a bool before). The possible values in these attributes are: 'O' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "origin" (default) or "local". This is the default behavior. 'D' - Trigger/Rule is disabled and fires never 'A' - Trigger/Rule fires always regardless of the setting of session_replication_role 'R' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "replica" The GUC variable can only be changed as long as the system does not have any cached query plans. This will prevent changing the session role and accidentally executing stored procedures or functions that have plans cached that expand to the wrong query set due to differences in the rule firing semantics. The SQL syntax for changing a triggers/rules firing semantics is ALTER TABLE <tabname> <when> TRIGGER|RULE <name>; <when> ::= ENABLE | ENABLE ALWAYS | ENABLE REPLICA | DISABLE psql's \d command as well as pg_dump are extended in a backward compatible fashion. Jan
2007-03-20 00:38:32 +01:00
#include "utils/plancache.h"
#include "utils/portal.h"
#include "utils/ps_status.h"
#include "utils/tzparser.h"
#include "utils/xml.h"
#ifndef PG_KRB_SRVTAB
#define PG_KRB_SRVTAB ""
#endif
#ifndef PG_KRB_SRVNAM
#define PG_KRB_SRVNAM ""
#endif
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
#define CONFIG_FILENAME "postgresql.conf"
#define HBA_FILENAME "pg_hba.conf"
#define IDENT_FILENAME "pg_ident.conf"
#ifdef EXEC_BACKEND
#define CONFIG_EXEC_PARAMS "global/config_exec_params"
#define CONFIG_EXEC_PARAMS_NEW "global/config_exec_params.new"
#endif
/* upper limit for GUC variables measured in kilobytes of memory */
/* note that various places assume the byte size fits in a "long" variable */
#if SIZEOF_SIZE_T > 4 && SIZEOF_LONG > 4
#define MAX_KILOBYTES INT_MAX
#else
#define MAX_KILOBYTES (INT_MAX / 1024)
#endif
/*
* Note: MAX_BACKENDS is limited to 2^23-1 because inval.c stores the
* backend ID as a 3-byte signed integer. Even if that limitation were
* removed, we still could not exceed INT_MAX/4 because some places compute
* 4*MaxBackends without any overflow check. This is rechecked in
* check_maxconnections, since MaxBackends is computed as MaxConnections
* plus autovacuum_max_workers plus one (for the autovacuum launcher).
*/
#define MAX_BACKENDS 0x7fffff
#define KB_PER_MB (1024)
#define KB_PER_GB (1024*1024)
#define MS_PER_S 1000
#define S_PER_MIN 60
#define MS_PER_MIN (1000 * 60)
#define MIN_PER_H 60
#define S_PER_H (60 * 60)
#define MS_PER_H (1000 * 60 * 60)
#define MIN_PER_D (60 * 24)
#define S_PER_D (60 * 60 * 24)
#define MS_PER_D (1000 * 60 * 60 * 24)
/* XXX these should appear in other modules' header files */
extern bool Log_disconnections;
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
extern int CommitDelay;
extern int CommitSiblings;
extern char *default_tablespace;
extern char *temp_tablespaces;
extern bool synchronize_seqscans;
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
extern bool fullPageWrites;
extern int ssl_renegotiation_limit;
extern char *SSLCipherSuites;
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
#ifdef TRACE_SORT
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
extern bool trace_sort;
#endif
#ifdef TRACE_SYNCSCAN
extern bool trace_syncscan;
#endif
#ifdef DEBUG_BOUNDED_SORT
extern bool optimize_bounded_sort;
#endif
static int GUC_check_errcode_value;
/* global variables for check hook support */
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
char *GUC_check_errmsg_string;
char *GUC_check_errdetail_string;
char *GUC_check_errhint_string;
static void set_config_sourcefile(const char *name, char *sourcefile,
int sourceline);
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
static bool call_bool_check_hook(struct config_bool * conf, bool *newval,
void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel);
static bool call_int_check_hook(struct config_int * conf, int *newval,
void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel);
static bool call_real_check_hook(struct config_real * conf, double *newval,
void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel);
static bool call_string_check_hook(struct config_string * conf, char **newval,
void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel);
static bool call_enum_check_hook(struct config_enum * conf, int *newval,
void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel);
static bool check_log_destination(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static void assign_log_destination(const char *newval, void *extra);
2002-04-21 02:22:52 +02:00
#ifdef HAVE_SYSLOG
static int syslog_facility = LOG_LOCAL0;
#else
static int syslog_facility = 0;
#endif
static void assign_syslog_facility(int newval, void *extra);
static void assign_syslog_ident(const char *newval, void *extra);
static void assign_session_replication_role(int newval, void *extra);
static bool check_temp_buffers(int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static bool check_phony_autocommit(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static bool check_debug_assertions(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static bool check_bonjour(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static bool check_ssl(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static bool check_stage_log_stats(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static bool check_log_stats(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static bool check_canonical_path(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static bool check_timezone_abbreviations(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static void assign_timezone_abbreviations(const char *newval, void *extra);
static void pg_timezone_abbrev_initialize(void);
static const char *show_archive_command(void);
static void assign_tcp_keepalives_idle(int newval, void *extra);
static void assign_tcp_keepalives_interval(int newval, void *extra);
static void assign_tcp_keepalives_count(int newval, void *extra);
static const char *show_tcp_keepalives_idle(void);
static const char *show_tcp_keepalives_interval(void);
static const char *show_tcp_keepalives_count(void);
static bool check_maxconnections(int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static void assign_maxconnections(int newval, void *extra);
static bool check_autovacuum_max_workers(int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static void assign_autovacuum_max_workers(int newval, void *extra);
static bool check_effective_io_concurrency(int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static void assign_effective_io_concurrency(int newval, void *extra);
static void assign_pgstat_temp_directory(const char *newval, void *extra);
static bool check_application_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
static void assign_application_name(const char *newval, void *extra);
static const char *show_unix_socket_permissions(void);
static const char *show_log_file_mode(void);
static char *config_enum_get_options(struct config_enum * record,
const char *prefix, const char *suffix,
const char *separator);
/*
* Options for enum values defined in this module.
*
* NOTE! Option values may not contain double quotes!
*/
static const struct config_enum_entry bytea_output_options[] = {
{"escape", BYTEA_OUTPUT_ESCAPE, false},
{"hex", BYTEA_OUTPUT_HEX, false},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
/*
* We have different sets for client and server message level options because
* they sort slightly different (see "log" level)
*/
static const struct config_enum_entry client_message_level_options[] = {
{"debug", DEBUG2, true},
{"debug5", DEBUG5, false},
{"debug4", DEBUG4, false},
{"debug3", DEBUG3, false},
{"debug2", DEBUG2, false},
{"debug1", DEBUG1, false},
{"log", LOG, false},
{"info", INFO, true},
{"notice", NOTICE, false},
{"warning", WARNING, false},
{"error", ERROR, false},
{"fatal", FATAL, true},
{"panic", PANIC, true},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
static const struct config_enum_entry server_message_level_options[] = {
{"debug", DEBUG2, true},
{"debug5", DEBUG5, false},
{"debug4", DEBUG4, false},
{"debug3", DEBUG3, false},
{"debug2", DEBUG2, false},
{"debug1", DEBUG1, false},
{"info", INFO, false},
{"notice", NOTICE, false},
{"warning", WARNING, false},
{"error", ERROR, false},
{"log", LOG, false},
{"fatal", FATAL, false},
{"panic", PANIC, false},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
static const struct config_enum_entry intervalstyle_options[] = {
{"postgres", INTSTYLE_POSTGRES, false},
{"postgres_verbose", INTSTYLE_POSTGRES_VERBOSE, false},
{"sql_standard", INTSTYLE_SQL_STANDARD, false},
{"iso_8601", INTSTYLE_ISO_8601, false},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
static const struct config_enum_entry log_error_verbosity_options[] = {
{"terse", PGERROR_TERSE, false},
{"default", PGERROR_DEFAULT, false},
{"verbose", PGERROR_VERBOSE, false},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
static const struct config_enum_entry log_statement_options[] = {
{"none", LOGSTMT_NONE, false},
{"ddl", LOGSTMT_DDL, false},
{"mod", LOGSTMT_MOD, false},
{"all", LOGSTMT_ALL, false},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
static const struct config_enum_entry isolation_level_options[] = {
{"serializable", XACT_SERIALIZABLE, false},
{"repeatable read", XACT_REPEATABLE_READ, false},
{"read committed", XACT_READ_COMMITTED, false},
{"read uncommitted", XACT_READ_UNCOMMITTED, false},
{NULL, 0}
};
static const struct config_enum_entry session_replication_role_options[] = {
{"origin", SESSION_REPLICATION_ROLE_ORIGIN, false},
{"replica", SESSION_REPLICATION_ROLE_REPLICA, false},
{"local", SESSION_REPLICATION_ROLE_LOCAL, false},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
static const struct config_enum_entry syslog_facility_options[] = {
#ifdef HAVE_SYSLOG
{"local0", LOG_LOCAL0, false},
{"local1", LOG_LOCAL1, false},
{"local2", LOG_LOCAL2, false},
{"local3", LOG_LOCAL3, false},
{"local4", LOG_LOCAL4, false},
{"local5", LOG_LOCAL5, false},
{"local6", LOG_LOCAL6, false},
{"local7", LOG_LOCAL7, false},
#else
{"none", 0, false},
#endif
{NULL, 0}
};
static const struct config_enum_entry track_function_options[] = {
{"none", TRACK_FUNC_OFF, false},
{"pl", TRACK_FUNC_PL, false},
{"all", TRACK_FUNC_ALL, false},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
static const struct config_enum_entry xmlbinary_options[] = {
{"base64", XMLBINARY_BASE64, false},
{"hex", XMLBINARY_HEX, false},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
static const struct config_enum_entry xmloption_options[] = {
{"content", XMLOPTION_CONTENT, false},
{"document", XMLOPTION_DOCUMENT, false},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
/*
* Although only "on", "off", and "safe_encoding" are documented, we
* accept all the likely variants of "on" and "off".
*/
static const struct config_enum_entry backslash_quote_options[] = {
{"safe_encoding", BACKSLASH_QUOTE_SAFE_ENCODING, false},
{"on", BACKSLASH_QUOTE_ON, false},
{"off", BACKSLASH_QUOTE_OFF, false},
{"true", BACKSLASH_QUOTE_ON, true},
{"false", BACKSLASH_QUOTE_OFF, true},
{"yes", BACKSLASH_QUOTE_ON, true},
{"no", BACKSLASH_QUOTE_OFF, true},
{"1", BACKSLASH_QUOTE_ON, true},
{"0", BACKSLASH_QUOTE_OFF, true},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
/*
* Although only "on", "off", and "partition" are documented, we
* accept all the likely variants of "on" and "off".
*/
static const struct config_enum_entry constraint_exclusion_options[] = {
{"partition", CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_PARTITION, false},
{"on", CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_ON, false},
{"off", CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_OFF, false},
{"true", CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_ON, true},
{"false", CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_OFF, true},
{"yes", CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_ON, true},
{"no", CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_OFF, true},
{"1", CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_ON, true},
{"0", CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_OFF, true},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
/*
* Although only "on", "off", and "local" are documented, we
* accept all the likely variants of "on" and "off".
*/
static const struct config_enum_entry synchronous_commit_options[] = {
{"local", SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_LOCAL_FLUSH, false},
{"on", SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_ON, false},
{"off", SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_OFF, false},
{"true", SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_ON, true},
{"false", SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_OFF, true},
{"yes", SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_ON, true},
{"no", SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_OFF, true},
{"1", SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_ON, true},
{"0", SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_OFF, true},
{NULL, 0, false}
};
2008-05-12 10:35:05 +02:00
/*
* Options for enum values stored in other modules
*/
extern const struct config_enum_entry wal_level_options[];
2008-05-12 10:35:05 +02:00
extern const struct config_enum_entry sync_method_options[];
/*
* GUC option variables that are exported from this module
*/
#ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
bool assert_enabled = true;
#else
bool assert_enabled = false;
#endif
bool log_duration = false;
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
bool Debug_print_plan = false;
bool Debug_print_parse = false;
bool Debug_print_rewritten = false;
bool Debug_pretty_print = true;
bool log_parser_stats = false;
bool log_planner_stats = false;
bool log_executor_stats = false;
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
bool log_statement_stats = false; /* this is sort of all three
* above together */
bool log_btree_build_stats = false;
bool check_function_bodies = true;
bool default_with_oids = false;
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
bool SQL_inheritance = true;
2002-08-15 00:07:56 +02:00
bool Password_encryption = true;
int log_min_error_statement = ERROR;
int log_min_messages = WARNING;
int client_min_messages = NOTICE;
int log_min_duration_statement = -1;
int log_temp_files = -1;
int trace_recovery_messages = LOG;
int temp_file_limit = -1;
int num_temp_buffers = 1024;
char *data_directory;
char *ConfigFileName;
char *HbaFileName;
char *IdentFileName;
char *external_pid_file;
char *pgstat_temp_directory;
char *application_name;
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
int tcp_keepalives_idle;
int tcp_keepalives_interval;
int tcp_keepalives_count;
/*
* These variables are all dummies that don't do anything, except in some
* cases provide the value for SHOW to display. The real state is elsewhere
* and is kept in sync by assign_hooks.
*/
static char *log_destination_string;
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
static char *syslog_ident_str;
static bool phony_autocommit;
static bool session_auth_is_superuser;
static double phony_random_seed;
static char *client_encoding_string;
static char *datestyle_string;
static char *locale_collate;
static char *locale_ctype;
static char *server_encoding_string;
static char *server_version_string;
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
static int server_version_num;
static char *timezone_string;
static char *log_timezone_string;
static char *timezone_abbreviations_string;
static char *XactIsoLevel_string;
static char *session_authorization_string;
static int max_function_args;
static int max_index_keys;
static int max_identifier_length;
static int block_size;
static int segment_size;
static int wal_block_size;
static int wal_segment_size;
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
static bool integer_datetimes;
static int effective_io_concurrency;
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/* should be static, but commands/variable.c needs to get at this */
char *role_string;
/*
* Displayable names for context types (enum GucContext)
*
* Note: these strings are deliberately not localized.
*/
2003-08-04 02:43:34 +02:00
const char *const GucContext_Names[] =
{
2003-08-04 02:43:34 +02:00
/* PGC_INTERNAL */ "internal",
/* PGC_POSTMASTER */ "postmaster",
/* PGC_SIGHUP */ "sighup",
/* PGC_BACKEND */ "backend",
/* PGC_SUSET */ "superuser",
/* PGC_USERSET */ "user"
};
/*
* Displayable names for source types (enum GucSource)
*
* Note: these strings are deliberately not localized.
2003-08-04 02:43:34 +02:00
*/
const char *const GucSource_Names[] =
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/* PGC_S_DEFAULT */ "default",
Split PGC_S_DEFAULT into two values, for true boot_val vs computed default. Failure to distinguish these cases is the real cause behind the recent reports of Windows builds crashing on 'infinity'::timestamp, which was directly due to failure to establish a value of timezone_abbreviations in postmaster child processes. The postmaster had the desired value, but write_one_nondefault_variable() didn't transmit it to backends. To fix that, invent a new value PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT, and be sure to use that or PGC_S_ENV_VAR (as appropriate) for "default" settings that are computed during initialization. (We need both because there's at least one variable that could receive a value from either source.) This commit also fixes ProcessConfigFile's failure to restore the correct default value for certain GUC variables if they are set in postgresql.conf and then removed/commented out of the file. We have to recompute and reinstall the value for any GUC variable that could have received a value from PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT or PGC_S_ENV_VAR sources, and there were a number of oversights. (That whole thing is a crock that needs to be redesigned, but not today.) However, I intentionally didn't make it work "exactly right" for the cases of timezone and log_timezone. The exactly right behavior would involve running select_default_timezone, which we'd have to do independently in each postgres process, causing the whole database to become entirely unresponsive for as much as several seconds. That didn't seem like a good idea, especially since the variable's removal from postgresql.conf might be just an accidental edit. Instead the behavior is to adopt the previously active setting as if it were default. Note that this patch creates an ABI break for extensions that use any of the PGC_S_XXX constants; they'll need to be recompiled.
2011-05-12 01:57:38 +02:00
/* PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT */ "default",
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/* PGC_S_ENV_VAR */ "environment variable",
/* PGC_S_FILE */ "configuration file",
/* PGC_S_ARGV */ "command line",
/* PGC_S_DATABASE */ "database",
/* PGC_S_USER */ "user",
/* PGC_S_DATABASE_USER */ "database user",
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/* PGC_S_CLIENT */ "client",
/* PGC_S_OVERRIDE */ "override",
/* PGC_S_INTERACTIVE */ "interactive",
/* PGC_S_TEST */ "test",
/* PGC_S_SESSION */ "session"
};
/*
* Displayable names for the groupings defined in enum config_group
*/
const char *const config_group_names[] =
{
/* UNGROUPED */
gettext_noop("Ungrouped"),
/* FILE_LOCATIONS */
gettext_noop("File Locations"),
/* CONN_AUTH */
gettext_noop("Connections and Authentication"),
/* CONN_AUTH_SETTINGS */
gettext_noop("Connections and Authentication / Connection Settings"),
/* CONN_AUTH_SECURITY */
gettext_noop("Connections and Authentication / Security and Authentication"),
/* RESOURCES */
gettext_noop("Resource Usage"),
/* RESOURCES_MEM */
gettext_noop("Resource Usage / Memory"),
/* RESOURCES_DISK */
gettext_noop("Resource Usage / Disk"),
/* RESOURCES_KERNEL */
gettext_noop("Resource Usage / Kernel Resources"),
/* RESOURCES_VACUUM_DELAY */
gettext_noop("Resource Usage / Cost-Based Vacuum Delay"),
/* RESOURCES_BGWRITER */
gettext_noop("Resource Usage / Background Writer"),
/* RESOURCES_ASYNCHRONOUS */
gettext_noop("Resource Usage / Asynchronous Behavior"),
/* WAL */
gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log"),
/* WAL_SETTINGS */
gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Settings"),
/* WAL_CHECKPOINTS */
gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Checkpoints"),
/* WAL_ARCHIVING */
gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Archiving"),
/* REPLICATION */
gettext_noop("Replication"),
/* REPLICATION_SENDING */
gettext_noop("Replication / Sending Servers"),
/* REPLICATION_MASTER */
gettext_noop("Replication / Master Server"),
/* REPLICATION_STANDBY */
gettext_noop("Replication / Standby Servers"),
/* QUERY_TUNING */
gettext_noop("Query Tuning"),
/* QUERY_TUNING_METHOD */
gettext_noop("Query Tuning / Planner Method Configuration"),
/* QUERY_TUNING_COST */
gettext_noop("Query Tuning / Planner Cost Constants"),
/* QUERY_TUNING_GEQO */
gettext_noop("Query Tuning / Genetic Query Optimizer"),
/* QUERY_TUNING_OTHER */
gettext_noop("Query Tuning / Other Planner Options"),
/* LOGGING */
gettext_noop("Reporting and Logging"),
/* LOGGING_WHERE */
gettext_noop("Reporting and Logging / Where to Log"),
/* LOGGING_WHEN */
gettext_noop("Reporting and Logging / When to Log"),
/* LOGGING_WHAT */
gettext_noop("Reporting and Logging / What to Log"),
/* STATS */
gettext_noop("Statistics"),
/* STATS_MONITORING */
gettext_noop("Statistics / Monitoring"),
/* STATS_COLLECTOR */
gettext_noop("Statistics / Query and Index Statistics Collector"),
/* AUTOVACUUM */
gettext_noop("Autovacuum"),
/* CLIENT_CONN */
gettext_noop("Client Connection Defaults"),
/* CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT */
gettext_noop("Client Connection Defaults / Statement Behavior"),
/* CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE */
gettext_noop("Client Connection Defaults / Locale and Formatting"),
/* CLIENT_CONN_OTHER */
gettext_noop("Client Connection Defaults / Other Defaults"),
/* LOCK_MANAGEMENT */
gettext_noop("Lock Management"),
/* COMPAT_OPTIONS */
gettext_noop("Version and Platform Compatibility"),
/* COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS */
gettext_noop("Version and Platform Compatibility / Previous PostgreSQL Versions"),
/* COMPAT_OPTIONS_CLIENT */
gettext_noop("Version and Platform Compatibility / Other Platforms and Clients"),
/* ERROR_HANDLING */
gettext_noop("Error Handling"),
/* PRESET_OPTIONS */
gettext_noop("Preset Options"),
/* CUSTOM_OPTIONS */
gettext_noop("Customized Options"),
/* DEVELOPER_OPTIONS */
gettext_noop("Developer Options"),
/* help_config wants this array to be null-terminated */
NULL
};
/*
* Displayable names for GUC variable types (enum config_type)
*
* Note: these strings are deliberately not localized.
*/
2003-08-04 02:43:34 +02:00
const char *const config_type_names[] =
{
2003-08-04 02:43:34 +02:00
/* PGC_BOOL */ "bool",
/* PGC_INT */ "integer",
/* PGC_REAL */ "real",
/* PGC_STRING */ "string",
/* PGC_ENUM */ "enum"
};
/*
* Contents of GUC tables
*
* See src/backend/utils/misc/README for design notes.
*
* TO ADD AN OPTION:
*
* 1. Declare a global variable of type bool, int, double, or char*
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
* and make use of it.
*
* 2. Decide at what times it's safe to set the option. See guc.h for
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
* details.
*
* 3. Decide on a name, a default value, upper and lower bounds (if
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
* applicable), etc.
*
* 4. Add a record below.
*
* 5. Add it to src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample, if
* appropriate.
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
*
* 6. Don't forget to document the option (at least in config.sgml).
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
*
* 7. If it's a new GUC_LIST option you must edit pg_dumpall.c to ensure
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
* it is not single quoted at dump time.
*/
/******** option records follow ********/
static struct config_bool ConfigureNamesBool[] =
{
{
{"enable_seqscan", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner's use of sequential-scan plans."),
NULL
},
&enable_seqscan,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"enable_indexscan", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner's use of index-scan plans."),
NULL
},
&enable_indexscan,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"enable_bitmapscan", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner's use of bitmap-scan plans."),
NULL
},
&enable_bitmapscan,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"enable_tidscan", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner's use of TID scan plans."),
NULL
},
&enable_tidscan,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"enable_sort", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner's use of explicit sort steps."),
NULL
},
&enable_sort,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"enable_hashagg", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner's use of hashed aggregation plans."),
NULL
},
&enable_hashagg,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"enable_material", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner's use of materialization."),
NULL
},
&enable_material,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"enable_nestloop", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner's use of nested-loop join plans."),
NULL
},
&enable_nestloop,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"enable_mergejoin", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner's use of merge join plans."),
NULL
},
&enable_mergejoin,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"enable_hashjoin", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner's use of hash join plans."),
NULL
},
&enable_hashjoin,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"geqo", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_GEQO,
gettext_noop("Enables genetic query optimization."),
gettext_noop("This algorithm attempts to do planning without "
"exhaustive searching.")
},
&enable_geqo,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
/* Not for general use --- used by SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION */
{"is_superuser", PGC_INTERNAL, UNGROUPED,
gettext_noop("Shows whether the current user is a superuser."),
NULL,
GUC_REPORT | GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL | GUC_NO_RESET_ALL | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&session_auth_is_superuser,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"bonjour", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Enables advertising the server via Bonjour."),
NULL
},
&enable_bonjour,
false,
check_bonjour, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"ssl", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SECURITY,
gettext_noop("Enables SSL connections."),
NULL
},
&EnableSSL,
false,
check_ssl, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"fsync", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Forces synchronization of updates to disk."),
gettext_noop("The server will use the fsync() system call in several places to make "
"sure that updates are physically written to disk. This insures "
"that a database cluster will recover to a consistent state after "
"an operating system or hardware crash.")
},
&enableFsync,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"zero_damaged_pages", PGC_SUSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Continues processing past damaged page headers."),
gettext_noop("Detection of a damaged page header normally causes PostgreSQL to "
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
"report an error, aborting the current transaction. Setting "
"zero_damaged_pages to true causes the system to instead report a "
"warning, zero out the damaged page, and continue processing. This "
"behavior will destroy data, namely all the rows on the damaged page."),
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&zero_damaged_pages,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"full_page_writes", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Writes full pages to WAL when first modified after a checkpoint."),
gettext_noop("A page write in process during an operating system crash might be "
"only partially written to disk. During recovery, the row changes "
"stored in WAL are not enough to recover. This option writes "
"pages when first modified after a checkpoint to WAL so full recovery "
"is possible.")
},
&fullPageWrites,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_checkpoints", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Logs each checkpoint."),
NULL
},
&log_checkpoints,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_connections", PGC_BACKEND, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Logs each successful connection."),
NULL
},
&Log_connections,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_disconnections", PGC_BACKEND, LOGGING_WHAT,
2004-10-12 23:54:45 +02:00
gettext_noop("Logs end of a session, including duration."),
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
NULL
},
&Log_disconnections,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"debug_assertions", PGC_USERSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Turns on various assertion checks."),
gettext_noop("This is a debugging aid."),
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&assert_enabled,
#ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING
true,
#else
false,
#endif
check_debug_assertions, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"exit_on_error", PGC_USERSET, ERROR_HANDLING_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Terminate session on any error."),
NULL
},
&ExitOnAnyError,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"restart_after_crash", PGC_SIGHUP, ERROR_HANDLING_OPTIONS,
2011-07-04 23:01:35 +02:00
gettext_noop("Reinitialize server after backend crash."),
NULL
},
&restart_after_crash,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_duration", PGC_SUSET, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Logs the duration of each completed SQL statement."),
NULL
},
&log_duration,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"debug_print_parse", PGC_USERSET, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Logs each query's parse tree."),
NULL
},
&Debug_print_parse,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"debug_print_rewritten", PGC_USERSET, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Logs each query's rewritten parse tree."),
NULL
},
&Debug_print_rewritten,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"debug_print_plan", PGC_USERSET, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Logs each query's execution plan."),
NULL
},
&Debug_print_plan,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"debug_pretty_print", PGC_USERSET, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Indents parse and plan tree displays."),
NULL
},
&Debug_pretty_print,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_parser_stats", PGC_SUSET, STATS_MONITORING,
gettext_noop("Writes parser performance statistics to the server log."),
NULL
},
&log_parser_stats,
false,
check_stage_log_stats, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_planner_stats", PGC_SUSET, STATS_MONITORING,
gettext_noop("Writes planner performance statistics to the server log."),
NULL
},
&log_planner_stats,
false,
check_stage_log_stats, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_executor_stats", PGC_SUSET, STATS_MONITORING,
gettext_noop("Writes executor performance statistics to the server log."),
NULL
},
&log_executor_stats,
false,
check_stage_log_stats, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_statement_stats", PGC_SUSET, STATS_MONITORING,
gettext_noop("Writes cumulative performance statistics to the server log."),
NULL
},
&log_statement_stats,
false,
check_log_stats, NULL, NULL
},
#ifdef BTREE_BUILD_STATS
{
{"log_btree_build_stats", PGC_SUSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("No description available."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&log_btree_build_stats,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
#endif
{
{"track_activities", PGC_SUSET, STATS_COLLECTOR,
gettext_noop("Collects information about executing commands."),
gettext_noop("Enables the collection of information on the currently "
"executing command of each session, along with "
"the time at which that command began execution.")
},
&pgstat_track_activities,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"track_counts", PGC_SUSET, STATS_COLLECTOR,
gettext_noop("Collects statistics on database activity."),
NULL
},
&pgstat_track_counts,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"update_process_title", PGC_SUSET, STATS_COLLECTOR,
gettext_noop("Updates the process title to show the active SQL command."),
gettext_noop("Enables updating of the process title every time a new SQL command is received by the server.")
},
&update_process_title,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"autovacuum", PGC_SIGHUP, AUTOVACUUM,
2005-10-29 02:31:52 +02:00
gettext_noop("Starts the autovacuum subprocess."),
NULL
},
&autovacuum_start_daemon,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"trace_notify", PGC_USERSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Generates debugging output for LISTEN and NOTIFY."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&Trace_notify,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
#ifdef LOCK_DEBUG
{
{"trace_locks", PGC_SUSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("No description available."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&Trace_locks,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"trace_userlocks", PGC_SUSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("No description available."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&Trace_userlocks,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"trace_lwlocks", PGC_SUSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("No description available."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&Trace_lwlocks,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"debug_deadlocks", PGC_SUSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("No description available."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&Debug_deadlocks,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
#endif
{
{"log_lock_waits", PGC_SUSET, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Logs long lock waits."),
NULL
},
&log_lock_waits,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_hostname", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Logs the host name in the connection logs."),
gettext_noop("By default, connection logs only show the IP address "
"of the connecting host. If you want them to show the host name you "
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
"can turn this on, but depending on your host name resolution "
"setup it might impose a non-negligible performance penalty.")
},
&log_hostname,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"sql_inheritance", PGC_USERSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS,
gettext_noop("Causes subtables to be included by default in various commands."),
NULL
},
&SQL_inheritance,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"password_encryption", PGC_USERSET, CONN_AUTH_SECURITY,
gettext_noop("Encrypt passwords."),
gettext_noop("When a password is specified in CREATE USER or "
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
"ALTER USER without writing either ENCRYPTED or UNENCRYPTED, "
"this parameter determines whether the password is to be encrypted.")
},
&Password_encryption,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"transform_null_equals", PGC_USERSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_CLIENT,
gettext_noop("Treats \"expr=NULL\" as \"expr IS NULL\"."),
gettext_noop("When turned on, expressions of the form expr = NULL "
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
"(or NULL = expr) are treated as expr IS NULL, that is, they "
"return true if expr evaluates to the null value, and false "
"otherwise. The correct behavior of expr = NULL is to always "
"return null (unknown).")
},
&Transform_null_equals,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"db_user_namespace", PGC_SIGHUP, CONN_AUTH_SECURITY,
gettext_noop("Enables per-database user names."),
NULL
},
&Db_user_namespace,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
/* only here for backwards compatibility */
{"autocommit", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("This parameter doesn't do anything."),
gettext_noop("It's just here so that we won't choke on SET AUTOCOMMIT TO ON from 7.3-vintage clients."),
GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&phony_autocommit,
true,
check_phony_autocommit, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"default_transaction_read_only", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the default read-only status of new transactions."),
NULL
},
&DefaultXactReadOnly,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"transaction_read_only", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the current transaction's read-only status."),
NULL,
GUC_NO_RESET_ALL | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&XactReadOnly,
false,
check_transaction_read_only, NULL, NULL
},
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
{
{"default_transaction_deferrable", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the default deferrable status of new transactions."),
NULL
},
&DefaultXactDeferrable,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
},
{
{"transaction_deferrable", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Whether to defer a read-only serializable transaction until it can be executed with no possible serialization failures."),
NULL,
GUC_NO_RESET_ALL | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&XactDeferrable,
false,
check_transaction_deferrable, NULL, NULL
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
},
{
{"check_function_bodies", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Check function bodies during CREATE FUNCTION."),
NULL
},
&check_function_bodies,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"array_nulls", PGC_USERSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS,
gettext_noop("Enable input of NULL elements in arrays."),
gettext_noop("When turned on, unquoted NULL in an array input "
2006-10-06 19:14:01 +02:00
"value means a null value; "
"otherwise it is taken literally.")
},
&Array_nulls,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"default_with_oids", PGC_USERSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS,
gettext_noop("Create new tables with OIDs by default."),
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
NULL
},
&default_with_oids,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"logging_collector", PGC_POSTMASTER, LOGGING_WHERE,
gettext_noop("Start a subprocess to capture stderr output and/or csvlogs into log files."),
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
NULL
},
&Logging_collector,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_truncate_on_rotation", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHERE,
2004-10-12 23:54:45 +02:00
gettext_noop("Truncate existing log files of same name during log rotation."),
NULL
},
&Log_truncate_on_rotation,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
#ifdef TRACE_SORT
{
{"trace_sort", PGC_USERSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Emit information about resource usage in sorting."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&trace_sort,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
#endif
#ifdef TRACE_SYNCSCAN
/* this is undocumented because not exposed in a standard build */
{
{"trace_syncscan", PGC_USERSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Generate debugging output for synchronized scanning."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&trace_syncscan,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
#endif
#ifdef DEBUG_BOUNDED_SORT
/* this is undocumented because not exposed in a standard build */
{
{
"optimize_bounded_sort", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_METHOD,
gettext_noop("Enable bounded sorting using heap sort."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&optimize_bounded_sort,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
#endif
#ifdef WAL_DEBUG
{
{"wal_debug", PGC_SUSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Emit WAL-related debugging output."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&XLOG_DEBUG,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
#endif
{
{"integer_datetimes", PGC_INTERNAL, PRESET_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Datetimes are integer based."),
NULL,
GUC_REPORT | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&integer_datetimes,
#ifdef HAVE_INT64_TIMESTAMP
true,
#else
false,
#endif
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"krb_caseins_users", PGC_SIGHUP, CONN_AUTH_SECURITY,
gettext_noop("Sets whether Kerberos and GSSAPI user names should be treated as case-insensitive."),
NULL
},
&pg_krb_caseins_users,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"escape_string_warning", PGC_USERSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS,
gettext_noop("Warn about backslash escapes in ordinary string literals."),
NULL
},
&escape_string_warning,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"standard_conforming_strings", PGC_USERSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS,
gettext_noop("Causes '...' strings to treat backslashes literally."),
NULL,
GUC_REPORT
},
&standard_conforming_strings,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"synchronize_seqscans", PGC_USERSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS,
gettext_noop("Enable synchronized sequential scans."),
NULL
},
&synchronize_seqscans,
true,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
{
{"archive_mode", PGC_POSTMASTER, WAL_ARCHIVING,
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
gettext_noop("Allows archiving of WAL files using archive_command."),
NULL
},
&XLogArchiveMode,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
},
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
{
{"hot_standby", PGC_POSTMASTER, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
gettext_noop("Allows connections and queries during recovery."),
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
NULL
},
&EnableHotStandby,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
},
{
{"hot_standby_feedback", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
2011-07-04 23:01:35 +02:00
gettext_noop("Allows feedback from a hot standby to the primary that will avoid query conflicts."),
NULL
},
&hot_standby_feedback,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"allow_system_table_mods", PGC_POSTMASTER, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
gettext_noop("Allows modifications of the structure of system tables."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&allowSystemTableMods,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"ignore_system_indexes", PGC_BACKEND, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
gettext_noop("Disables reading from system indexes."),
gettext_noop("It does not prevent updating the indexes, so it is safe "
"to use. The worst consequence is slowness."),
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&IgnoreSystemIndexes,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"lo_compat_privileges", PGC_SUSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS,
2010-03-21 01:17:59 +01:00
gettext_noop("Enables backward compatibility mode for privilege checks on large objects."),
gettext_noop("Skips privilege checks when reading or modifying large objects, "
2010-02-26 03:01:40 +01:00
"for compatibility with PostgreSQL releases prior to 9.0.")
},
&lo_compat_privileges,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"quote_all_identifiers", PGC_USERSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS,
gettext_noop("When generating SQL fragments, quote all identifiers."),
NULL,
},
&quote_all_identifiers,
false,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
/* End-of-list marker */
{
{NULL, 0, 0, NULL, NULL}, NULL, false, NULL, NULL, NULL
}
};
static struct config_int ConfigureNamesInt[] =
{
{
{"archive_timeout", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVING,
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
gettext_noop("Forces a switch to the next xlog file if a "
"new file has not been started within N seconds."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_S
},
&XLogArchiveTimeout,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"post_auth_delay", PGC_BACKEND, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
gettext_noop("Waits N seconds on connection startup after authentication."),
gettext_noop("This allows attaching a debugger to the process."),
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_UNIT_S
},
&PostAuthDelay,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"default_statistics_target", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_OTHER,
gettext_noop("Sets the default statistics target."),
gettext_noop("This applies to table columns that have not had a "
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
"column-specific target set via ALTER TABLE SET STATISTICS.")
},
&default_statistics_target,
100, 1, 10000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"from_collapse_limit", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_OTHER,
gettext_noop("Sets the FROM-list size beyond which subqueries "
"are not collapsed."),
gettext_noop("The planner will merge subqueries into upper "
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
"queries if the resulting FROM list would have no more than "
"this many items.")
},
&from_collapse_limit,
8, 1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"join_collapse_limit", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_OTHER,
gettext_noop("Sets the FROM-list size beyond which JOIN "
"constructs are not flattened."),
gettext_noop("The planner will flatten explicit JOIN "
"constructs into lists of FROM items whenever a "
"list of no more than this many items would result.")
},
&join_collapse_limit,
8, 1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"geqo_threshold", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_GEQO,
gettext_noop("Sets the threshold of FROM items beyond which GEQO is used."),
NULL
},
&geqo_threshold,
12, 2, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"geqo_effort", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_GEQO,
gettext_noop("GEQO: effort is used to set the default for other GEQO parameters."),
NULL
},
&Geqo_effort,
DEFAULT_GEQO_EFFORT, MIN_GEQO_EFFORT, MAX_GEQO_EFFORT,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"geqo_pool_size", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_GEQO,
gettext_noop("GEQO: number of individuals in the population."),
gettext_noop("Zero selects a suitable default value.")
},
&Geqo_pool_size,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"geqo_generations", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_GEQO,
gettext_noop("GEQO: number of iterations of the algorithm."),
gettext_noop("Zero selects a suitable default value.")
},
&Geqo_generations,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
/* This is PGC_SUSET to prevent hiding from log_lock_waits. */
{"deadlock_timeout", PGC_SUSET, LOCK_MANAGEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the time to wait on a lock before checking for deadlock."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_MS
},
&DeadlockTimeout,
1000, 1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"max_standby_archive_delay", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum delay before canceling queries when a hot standby server is processing archived WAL data."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_MS
},
&max_standby_archive_delay,
30 * 1000, -1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"max_standby_streaming_delay", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum delay before canceling queries when a hot standby server is processing streamed WAL data."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_MS
},
&max_standby_streaming_delay,
30 * 1000, -1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"wal_receiver_status_interval", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
2011-07-04 23:01:35 +02:00
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum interval between WAL receiver status reports to the primary."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_S
},
&wal_receiver_status_interval,
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
10, 0, INT_MAX / 1000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"max_connections", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum number of concurrent connections."),
NULL
},
&MaxConnections,
100, 1, MAX_BACKENDS,
check_maxconnections, assign_maxconnections, NULL
},
{
{"superuser_reserved_connections", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the number of connection slots reserved for superusers."),
NULL
},
&ReservedBackends,
3, 0, MAX_BACKENDS,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
/*
* We sometimes multiply the number of shared buffers by two without
* checking for overflow, so we mustn't allow more than INT_MAX / 2.
*/
{
{"shared_buffers", PGC_POSTMASTER, RESOURCES_MEM,
gettext_noop("Sets the number of shared memory buffers used by the server."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_BLOCKS
},
&NBuffers,
1024, 16, INT_MAX / 2,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"temp_buffers", PGC_USERSET, RESOURCES_MEM,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum number of temporary buffers used by each session."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_BLOCKS
},
&num_temp_buffers,
1024, 100, INT_MAX / 2,
check_temp_buffers, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"port", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the TCP port the server listens on."),
NULL
},
&PostPortNumber,
DEF_PGPORT, 1, 65535,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"unix_socket_permissions", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the access permissions of the Unix-domain socket."),
gettext_noop("Unix-domain sockets use the usual Unix file system "
"permission set. The parameter value is expected "
"to be a numeric mode specification in the form "
"accepted by the chmod and umask system calls. "
"(To use the customary octal format the number must "
"start with a 0 (zero).)")
},
&Unix_socket_permissions,
0777, 0000, 0777,
NULL, NULL, show_unix_socket_permissions
},
{
{"log_file_mode", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHERE,
gettext_noop("Sets the file permissions for log files."),
gettext_noop("The parameter value is expected "
"to be a numeric mode specification in the form "
"accepted by the chmod and umask system calls. "
"(To use the customary octal format the number must "
"start with a 0 (zero).)")
},
&Log_file_mode,
0600, 0000, 0777,
NULL, NULL, show_log_file_mode
},
{
{"work_mem", PGC_USERSET, RESOURCES_MEM,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum memory to be used for query workspaces."),
gettext_noop("This much memory can be used by each internal "
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
"sort operation and hash table before switching to "
"temporary disk files."),
GUC_UNIT_KB
},
&work_mem,
1024, 64, MAX_KILOBYTES,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"maintenance_work_mem", PGC_USERSET, RESOURCES_MEM,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum memory to be used for maintenance operations."),
gettext_noop("This includes operations such as VACUUM and CREATE INDEX."),
GUC_UNIT_KB
},
&maintenance_work_mem,
16384, 1024, MAX_KILOBYTES,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
/*
* We use the hopefully-safely-small value of 100kB as the compiled-in
* default for max_stack_depth. InitializeGUCOptions will increase it if
* possible, depending on the actual platform-specific stack limit.
*/
{
{"max_stack_depth", PGC_SUSET, RESOURCES_MEM,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum stack depth, in kilobytes."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_KB
},
&max_stack_depth,
100, 100, MAX_KILOBYTES,
check_max_stack_depth, assign_max_stack_depth, NULL
},
{
{"temp_file_limit", PGC_SUSET, RESOURCES_DISK,
gettext_noop("Limits the total size of all temp files used by each session."),
gettext_noop("-1 means no limit."),
GUC_UNIT_KB
},
&temp_file_limit,
-1, -1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
{
{"vacuum_cost_page_hit", PGC_USERSET, RESOURCES_VACUUM_DELAY,
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
gettext_noop("Vacuum cost for a page found in the buffer cache."),
NULL
},
&VacuumCostPageHit,
1, 0, 10000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
},
{
{"vacuum_cost_page_miss", PGC_USERSET, RESOURCES_VACUUM_DELAY,
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
gettext_noop("Vacuum cost for a page not found in the buffer cache."),
NULL
},
&VacuumCostPageMiss,
10, 0, 10000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
},
{
{"vacuum_cost_page_dirty", PGC_USERSET, RESOURCES_VACUUM_DELAY,
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
gettext_noop("Vacuum cost for a page dirtied by vacuum."),
NULL
},
&VacuumCostPageDirty,
20, 0, 10000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
},
{
{"vacuum_cost_limit", PGC_USERSET, RESOURCES_VACUUM_DELAY,
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
gettext_noop("Vacuum cost amount available before napping."),
NULL
},
&VacuumCostLimit,
200, 1, 10000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
},
{
{"vacuum_cost_delay", PGC_USERSET, RESOURCES_VACUUM_DELAY,
gettext_noop("Vacuum cost delay in milliseconds."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_MS
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
},
&VacuumCostDelay,
0, 0, 100,
NULL, NULL, NULL
2004-02-06 20:36:18 +01:00
},
{
{"autovacuum_vacuum_cost_delay", PGC_SIGHUP, AUTOVACUUM,
gettext_noop("Vacuum cost delay in milliseconds, for autovacuum."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_MS
},
&autovacuum_vac_cost_delay,
20, -1, 100,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"autovacuum_vacuum_cost_limit", PGC_SIGHUP, AUTOVACUUM,
gettext_noop("Vacuum cost amount available before napping, for autovacuum."),
NULL
},
&autovacuum_vac_cost_limit,
-1, -1, 10000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"max_files_per_process", PGC_POSTMASTER, RESOURCES_KERNEL,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum number of simultaneously open files for each server process."),
NULL
},
&max_files_per_process,
1000, 25, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
/*
* See also CheckRequiredParameterValues() if this parameter changes
*/
{
{"max_prepared_transactions", PGC_POSTMASTER, RESOURCES_MEM,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum number of simultaneously prepared transactions."),
NULL
},
&max_prepared_xacts,
0, 0, MAX_BACKENDS,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
#ifdef LOCK_DEBUG
{
{"trace_lock_oidmin", PGC_SUSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("No description available."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&Trace_lock_oidmin,
FirstNormalObjectId, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"trace_lock_table", PGC_SUSET, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("No description available."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&Trace_lock_table,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
#endif
{
{"statement_timeout", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum allowed duration of any statement."),
gettext_noop("A value of 0 turns off the timeout."),
GUC_UNIT_MS
},
&StatementTimeout,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"vacuum_freeze_min_age", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Minimum age at which VACUUM should freeze a table row."),
NULL
},
&vacuum_freeze_min_age,
50000000, 0, 1000000000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"vacuum_freeze_table_age", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Age at which VACUUM should scan whole table to freeze tuples."),
NULL
},
&vacuum_freeze_table_age,
150000000, 0, 2000000000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
{
{"vacuum_defer_cleanup_age", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_MASTER,
gettext_noop("Number of transactions by which VACUUM and HOT cleanup should be deferred, if any."),
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
NULL
},
&vacuum_defer_cleanup_age,
0, 0, 1000000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
},
/*
* See also CheckRequiredParameterValues() if this parameter changes
*/
{
{"max_locks_per_transaction", PGC_POSTMASTER, LOCK_MANAGEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum number of locks per transaction."),
gettext_noop("The shared lock table is sized on the assumption that "
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
"at most max_locks_per_transaction * max_connections distinct "
"objects will need to be locked at any one time.")
},
&max_locks_per_xact,
64, 10, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
{
{"max_pred_locks_per_transaction", PGC_POSTMASTER, LOCK_MANAGEMENT,
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum number of predicate locks per transaction."),
gettext_noop("The shared predicate lock table is sized on the assumption that "
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
"at most max_pred_locks_per_transaction * max_connections distinct "
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
"objects will need to be locked at any one time.")
},
&max_predicate_locks_per_xact,
64, 10, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
},
{
{"authentication_timeout", PGC_SIGHUP, CONN_AUTH_SECURITY,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum allowed time to complete client authentication."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_S
},
&AuthenticationTimeout,
60, 1, 600,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
/* Not for general use */
{"pre_auth_delay", PGC_SIGHUP, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Waits N seconds on connection startup before authentication."),
gettext_noop("This allows attaching a debugger to the process."),
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_UNIT_S
},
&PreAuthDelay,
0, 0, 60,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"wal_keep_segments", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_SENDING,
2010-04-22 21:40:03 +02:00
gettext_noop("Sets the number of WAL files held for standby servers."),
NULL
},
&wal_keep_segments,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"checkpoint_segments", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_CHECKPOINTS,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum distance in log segments between automatic WAL checkpoints."),
NULL
},
&CheckPointSegments,
3, 1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
XLOG (and related) changes: * Store two past checkpoint locations, not just one, in pg_control. On startup, we fall back to the older checkpoint if the newer one is unreadable. Also, a physical copy of the newest checkpoint record is kept in pg_control for possible use in disaster recovery (ie, complete loss of pg_xlog). Also add a version number for pg_control itself. Remove archdir from pg_control; it ought to be a GUC parameter, not a special case (not that it's implemented yet anyway). * Suppress successive checkpoint records when nothing has been entered in the WAL log since the last one. This is not so much to avoid I/O as to make it actually useful to keep track of the last two checkpoints. If the things are right next to each other then there's not a lot of redundancy gained... * Change CRC scheme to a true 64-bit CRC, not a pair of 32-bit CRCs on alternate bytes. Polynomial borrowed from ECMA DLT1 standard. * Fix XLOG record length handling so that it will work at BLCKSZ = 32k. * Change XID allocation to work more like OID allocation. (This is of dubious necessity, but I think it's a good idea anyway.) * Fix a number of minor bugs, such as off-by-one logic for XLOG file wraparound at the 4 gig mark. * Add documentation and clean up some coding infelicities; move file format declarations out to include files where planned contrib utilities can get at them. * Checkpoint will now occur every CHECKPOINT_SEGMENTS log segments or every CHECKPOINT_TIMEOUT seconds, whichever comes first. It is also possible to force a checkpoint by sending SIGUSR1 to the postmaster (undocumented feature...) * Defend against kill -9 postmaster by storing shmem block's key and ID in postmaster.pid lockfile, and checking at startup to ensure that no processes are still connected to old shmem block (if it still exists). * Switch backends to accept SIGQUIT rather than SIGUSR1 for emergency stop, for symmetry with postmaster and xlog utilities. Clean up signal handling in bootstrap.c so that xlog utilities launched by postmaster will react to signals better. * Standalone bootstrap now grabs lockfile in target directory, as added insurance against running it in parallel with live postmaster.
2001-03-13 02:17:06 +01:00
{
{"checkpoint_timeout", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_CHECKPOINTS,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum time between automatic WAL checkpoints."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_S
},
&CheckPointTimeout,
300, 30, 3600,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
2000-11-09 12:26:00 +01:00
{
{"checkpoint_warning", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_CHECKPOINTS,
gettext_noop("Enables warnings if checkpoint segments are filled more "
"frequently than this."),
gettext_noop("Write a message to the server log if checkpoints "
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
"caused by the filling of checkpoint segment files happens more "
"frequently than this number of seconds. Zero turns off the warning."),
GUC_UNIT_S
},
&CheckPointWarning,
30, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"wal_buffers", PGC_POSTMASTER, WAL_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the number of disk-page buffers in shared memory for WAL."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_XBLOCKS
},
&XLOGbuffers,
-1, -1, INT_MAX,
check_wal_buffers, NULL, NULL
},
2000-11-09 12:26:00 +01:00
{
{"wal_writer_delay", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("WAL writer sleep time between WAL flushes."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_MS
},
&WalWriterDelay,
200, 1, 10000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
/* see max_connections */
{"max_wal_senders", PGC_POSTMASTER, REPLICATION_SENDING,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum number of simultaneously running WAL sender processes."),
NULL
},
&max_wal_senders,
0, 0, MAX_BACKENDS,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"replication_timeout", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_SENDING,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum time to wait for WAL replication."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_MS
},
&replication_timeout,
60 * 1000, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"commit_delay", PGC_USERSET, WAL_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the delay in microseconds between transaction commit and "
"flushing WAL to disk."),
NULL
},
&CommitDelay,
0, 0, 100000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"commit_siblings", PGC_USERSET, WAL_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the minimum concurrent open transactions before performing "
"commit_delay."),
NULL
},
&CommitSiblings,
5, 0, 1000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"extra_float_digits", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets the number of digits displayed for floating-point values."),
gettext_noop("This affects real, double precision, and geometric data types. "
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
"The parameter value is added to the standard number of digits "
"(FLT_DIG or DBL_DIG as appropriate).")
},
&extra_float_digits,
0, -15, 3,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_min_duration_statement", PGC_SUSET, LOGGING_WHEN,
gettext_noop("Sets the minimum execution time above which "
"statements will be logged."),
gettext_noop("Zero prints all queries. -1 turns this feature off."),
GUC_UNIT_MS
},
&log_min_duration_statement,
-1, -1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_autovacuum_min_duration", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Sets the minimum execution time above which "
"autovacuum actions will be logged."),
gettext_noop("Zero prints all actions. -1 turns autovacuum logging off."),
GUC_UNIT_MS
},
&Log_autovacuum_min_duration,
-1, -1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"bgwriter_delay", PGC_SIGHUP, RESOURCES_BGWRITER,
gettext_noop("Background writer sleep time between rounds."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_MS
},
&BgWriterDelay,
200, 10, 10000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"bgwriter_lru_maxpages", PGC_SIGHUP, RESOURCES_BGWRITER,
gettext_noop("Background writer maximum number of LRU pages to flush per round."),
NULL
},
&bgwriter_lru_maxpages,
100, 0, 1000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"effective_io_concurrency",
#ifdef USE_PREFETCH
PGC_USERSET,
#else
PGC_INTERNAL,
#endif
RESOURCES_ASYNCHRONOUS,
gettext_noop("Number of simultaneous requests that can be handled efficiently by the disk subsystem."),
gettext_noop("For RAID arrays, this should be approximately the number of drive spindles in the array.")
},
&effective_io_concurrency,
#ifdef USE_PREFETCH
1, 0, 1000,
#else
0, 0, 0,
#endif
check_effective_io_concurrency, assign_effective_io_concurrency, NULL
},
{
{"log_rotation_age", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHERE,
gettext_noop("Automatic log file rotation will occur after N minutes."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_MIN
},
&Log_RotationAge,
HOURS_PER_DAY * MINS_PER_HOUR, 0, INT_MAX / MINS_PER_HOUR,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_rotation_size", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHERE,
gettext_noop("Automatic log file rotation will occur after N kilobytes."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_KB
},
&Log_RotationSize,
10 * 1024, 0, INT_MAX / 1024,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"max_function_args", PGC_INTERNAL, PRESET_OPTIONS,
2004-10-12 23:54:45 +02:00
gettext_noop("Shows the maximum number of function arguments."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&max_function_args,
FUNC_MAX_ARGS, FUNC_MAX_ARGS, FUNC_MAX_ARGS,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"max_index_keys", PGC_INTERNAL, PRESET_OPTIONS,
2004-10-12 23:54:45 +02:00
gettext_noop("Shows the maximum number of index keys."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&max_index_keys,
INDEX_MAX_KEYS, INDEX_MAX_KEYS, INDEX_MAX_KEYS,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"max_identifier_length", PGC_INTERNAL, PRESET_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Shows the maximum identifier length."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&max_identifier_length,
NAMEDATALEN - 1, NAMEDATALEN - 1, NAMEDATALEN - 1,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"block_size", PGC_INTERNAL, PRESET_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Shows the size of a disk block."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&block_size,
BLCKSZ, BLCKSZ, BLCKSZ,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"segment_size", PGC_INTERNAL, PRESET_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Shows the number of pages per disk file."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_BLOCKS | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&segment_size,
RELSEG_SIZE, RELSEG_SIZE, RELSEG_SIZE,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"wal_block_size", PGC_INTERNAL, PRESET_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Shows the block size in the write ahead log."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&wal_block_size,
XLOG_BLCKSZ, XLOG_BLCKSZ, XLOG_BLCKSZ,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"wal_segment_size", PGC_INTERNAL, PRESET_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Shows the number of pages per write ahead log segment."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_XBLOCKS | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&wal_segment_size,
(XLOG_SEG_SIZE / XLOG_BLCKSZ),
(XLOG_SEG_SIZE / XLOG_BLCKSZ),
(XLOG_SEG_SIZE / XLOG_BLCKSZ),
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"autovacuum_naptime", PGC_SIGHUP, AUTOVACUUM,
gettext_noop("Time to sleep between autovacuum runs."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_S
},
&autovacuum_naptime,
60, 1, INT_MAX / 1000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"autovacuum_vacuum_threshold", PGC_SIGHUP, AUTOVACUUM,
gettext_noop("Minimum number of tuple updates or deletes prior to vacuum."),
NULL
},
&autovacuum_vac_thresh,
50, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"autovacuum_analyze_threshold", PGC_SIGHUP, AUTOVACUUM,
gettext_noop("Minimum number of tuple inserts, updates or deletes prior to analyze."),
NULL
},
&autovacuum_anl_thresh,
50, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
/* see varsup.c for why this is PGC_POSTMASTER not PGC_SIGHUP */
{"autovacuum_freeze_max_age", PGC_POSTMASTER, AUTOVACUUM,
2006-11-29 15:50:07 +01:00
gettext_noop("Age at which to autovacuum a table to prevent transaction ID wraparound."),
NULL
},
&autovacuum_freeze_max_age,
/* see pg_resetxlog if you change the upper-limit value */
200000000, 100000000, 2000000000,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
/* see max_connections */
{"autovacuum_max_workers", PGC_POSTMASTER, AUTOVACUUM,
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum number of simultaneously running autovacuum worker processes."),
NULL
},
&autovacuum_max_workers,
3, 1, MAX_BACKENDS,
check_autovacuum_max_workers, assign_autovacuum_max_workers, NULL
},
{
{"tcp_keepalives_idle", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_OTHER,
gettext_noop("Time between issuing TCP keepalives."),
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
gettext_noop("A value of 0 uses the system default."),
GUC_UNIT_S
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
},
&tcp_keepalives_idle,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, assign_tcp_keepalives_idle, show_tcp_keepalives_idle
},
{
{"tcp_keepalives_interval", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_OTHER,
gettext_noop("Time between TCP keepalive retransmits."),
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
gettext_noop("A value of 0 uses the system default."),
GUC_UNIT_S
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
},
&tcp_keepalives_interval,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, assign_tcp_keepalives_interval, show_tcp_keepalives_interval
},
{
{"ssl_renegotiation_limit", PGC_USERSET, CONN_AUTH_SECURITY,
gettext_noop("Set the amount of traffic to send and receive before renegotiating the encryption keys."),
NULL,
GUC_UNIT_KB,
},
&ssl_renegotiation_limit,
512 * 1024, 0, MAX_KILOBYTES,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"tcp_keepalives_count", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_OTHER,
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
gettext_noop("Maximum number of TCP keepalive retransmits."),
gettext_noop("This controls the number of consecutive keepalive retransmits that can be "
"lost before a connection is considered dead. A value of 0 uses the "
"system default."),
},
&tcp_keepalives_count,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, assign_tcp_keepalives_count, show_tcp_keepalives_count
},
{
{"gin_fuzzy_search_limit", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_OTHER,
2006-10-06 19:14:01 +02:00
gettext_noop("Sets the maximum allowed result for exact search by GIN."),
NULL,
0
},
&GinFuzzySearchLimit,
0, 0, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"effective_cache_size", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_COST,
gettext_noop("Sets the planner's assumption about the size of the disk cache."),
gettext_noop("That is, the portion of the kernel's disk cache that "
"will be used for PostgreSQL data files. This is measured in disk "
"pages, which are normally 8 kB each."),
GUC_UNIT_BLOCKS,
},
&effective_cache_size,
DEFAULT_EFFECTIVE_CACHE_SIZE, 1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
/* Can't be set in postgresql.conf */
{"server_version_num", PGC_INTERNAL, PRESET_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Shows the server version as an integer."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&server_version_num,
PG_VERSION_NUM, PG_VERSION_NUM, PG_VERSION_NUM,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_temp_files", PGC_SUSET, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Log the use of temporary files larger than this number of kilobytes."),
gettext_noop("Zero logs all files. The default is -1 (turning this feature off)."),
GUC_UNIT_KB
},
&log_temp_files,
-1, -1, INT_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"track_activity_query_size", PGC_POSTMASTER, RESOURCES_MEM,
gettext_noop("Sets the size reserved for pg_stat_activity.current_query, in bytes."),
NULL,
},
&pgstat_track_activity_query_size,
1024, 100, 102400,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
/* End-of-list marker */
{
{NULL, 0, 0, NULL, NULL}, NULL, 0, 0, 0, NULL, NULL, NULL
}
};
static struct config_real ConfigureNamesReal[] =
{
{
{"seq_page_cost", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_COST,
gettext_noop("Sets the planner's estimate of the cost of a "
"sequentially fetched disk page."),
NULL
},
&seq_page_cost,
DEFAULT_SEQ_PAGE_COST, 0, DBL_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"random_page_cost", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_COST,
gettext_noop("Sets the planner's estimate of the cost of a "
"nonsequentially fetched disk page."),
NULL
},
&random_page_cost,
DEFAULT_RANDOM_PAGE_COST, 0, DBL_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"cpu_tuple_cost", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_COST,
gettext_noop("Sets the planner's estimate of the cost of "
"processing each tuple (row)."),
NULL
},
&cpu_tuple_cost,
DEFAULT_CPU_TUPLE_COST, 0, DBL_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"cpu_index_tuple_cost", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_COST,
gettext_noop("Sets the planner's estimate of the cost of "
"processing each index entry during an index scan."),
NULL
},
&cpu_index_tuple_cost,
DEFAULT_CPU_INDEX_TUPLE_COST, 0, DBL_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"cpu_operator_cost", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_COST,
gettext_noop("Sets the planner's estimate of the cost of "
"processing each operator or function call."),
NULL
},
&cpu_operator_cost,
DEFAULT_CPU_OPERATOR_COST, 0, DBL_MAX,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"cursor_tuple_fraction", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_OTHER,
gettext_noop("Sets the planner's estimate of the fraction of "
"a cursor's rows that will be retrieved."),
NULL
},
&cursor_tuple_fraction,
DEFAULT_CURSOR_TUPLE_FRACTION, 0.0, 1.0,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"geqo_selection_bias", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_GEQO,
gettext_noop("GEQO: selective pressure within the population."),
NULL
},
&Geqo_selection_bias,
DEFAULT_GEQO_SELECTION_BIAS,
MIN_GEQO_SELECTION_BIAS, MAX_GEQO_SELECTION_BIAS,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"geqo_seed", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_GEQO,
gettext_noop("GEQO: seed for random path selection."),
NULL
},
&Geqo_seed,
0.0, 0.0, 1.0,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"bgwriter_lru_multiplier", PGC_SIGHUP, RESOURCES_BGWRITER,
gettext_noop("Multiple of the average buffer usage to free per round."),
NULL
},
&bgwriter_lru_multiplier,
2.0, 0.0, 10.0,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"seed", PGC_USERSET, UNGROUPED,
gettext_noop("Sets the seed for random-number generation."),
NULL,
GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL | GUC_NO_RESET_ALL | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&phony_random_seed,
0.0, -1.0, 1.0,
check_random_seed, assign_random_seed, show_random_seed
},
{
{"autovacuum_vacuum_scale_factor", PGC_SIGHUP, AUTOVACUUM,
gettext_noop("Number of tuple updates or deletes prior to vacuum as a fraction of reltuples."),
NULL
},
&autovacuum_vac_scale,
0.2, 0.0, 100.0,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"autovacuum_analyze_scale_factor", PGC_SIGHUP, AUTOVACUUM,
gettext_noop("Number of tuple inserts, updates or deletes prior to analyze as a fraction of reltuples."),
NULL
},
&autovacuum_anl_scale,
0.1, 0.0, 100.0,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"checkpoint_completion_target", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_CHECKPOINTS,
gettext_noop("Time spent flushing dirty buffers during checkpoint, as fraction of checkpoint interval."),
NULL
},
&CheckPointCompletionTarget,
0.5, 0.0, 1.0,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
/* End-of-list marker */
{
{NULL, 0, 0, NULL, NULL}, NULL, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, NULL, NULL, NULL
}
};
static struct config_string ConfigureNamesString[] =
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
{
{"archive_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVING,
gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will be called to archive a WAL file."),
NULL
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
},
&XLogArchiveCommand,
"",
NULL, NULL, show_archive_command
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
},
{
{"client_encoding", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets the client's character set encoding."),
NULL,
GUC_IS_NAME | GUC_REPORT
},
&client_encoding_string,
"SQL_ASCII",
check_client_encoding, assign_client_encoding, NULL
},
{
{"log_line_prefix", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Controls information prefixed to each log line."),
gettext_noop("If blank, no prefix is used.")
},
&Log_line_prefix,
"",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_timezone", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Sets the time zone to use in log messages."),
NULL
},
&log_timezone_string,
"GMT",
check_log_timezone, assign_log_timezone, show_log_timezone
},
{
{"DateStyle", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets the display format for date and time values."),
gettext_noop("Also controls interpretation of ambiguous "
"date inputs."),
GUC_LIST_INPUT | GUC_REPORT
},
&datestyle_string,
"ISO, MDY",
check_datestyle, assign_datestyle, NULL
},
{
{"default_tablespace", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the default tablespace to create tables and indexes in."),
gettext_noop("An empty string selects the database's default tablespace."),
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
GUC_IS_NAME
},
&default_tablespace,
"",
check_default_tablespace, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"temp_tablespaces", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the tablespace(s) to use for temporary tables and sort files."),
NULL,
GUC_LIST_INPUT | GUC_LIST_QUOTE
},
&temp_tablespaces,
"",
check_temp_tablespaces, assign_temp_tablespaces, NULL
},
{
{"dynamic_library_path", PGC_SUSET, CLIENT_CONN_OTHER,
gettext_noop("Sets the path for dynamically loadable modules."),
gettext_noop("If a dynamically loadable module needs to be opened and "
"the specified name does not have a directory component (i.e., the "
"name does not contain a slash), the system will search this path for "
"the specified file."),
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&Dynamic_library_path,
"$libdir",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"krb_server_keyfile", PGC_SIGHUP, CONN_AUTH_SECURITY,
gettext_noop("Sets the location of the Kerberos server key file."),
NULL,
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&pg_krb_server_keyfile,
PG_KRB_SRVTAB,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"krb_srvname", PGC_SIGHUP, CONN_AUTH_SECURITY,
gettext_noop("Sets the name of the Kerberos service."),
NULL
},
&pg_krb_srvnam,
PG_KRB_SRVNAM,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"bonjour_name", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the Bonjour service name."),
NULL
},
&bonjour_name,
"",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
/* See main.c about why defaults for LC_foo are not all alike */
{
{"lc_collate", PGC_INTERNAL, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Shows the collation order locale."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&locale_collate,
"C",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"lc_ctype", PGC_INTERNAL, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Shows the character classification and case conversion locale."),
NULL,
GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&locale_ctype,
"C",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"lc_messages", PGC_SUSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets the language in which messages are displayed."),
NULL
},
&locale_messages,
"",
check_locale_messages, assign_locale_messages, NULL
},
{
{"lc_monetary", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets the locale for formatting monetary amounts."),
NULL
},
&locale_monetary,
"C",
check_locale_monetary, assign_locale_monetary, NULL
},
{
{"lc_numeric", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets the locale for formatting numbers."),
NULL
},
&locale_numeric,
"C",
check_locale_numeric, assign_locale_numeric, NULL
},
{
{"lc_time", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets the locale for formatting date and time values."),
NULL
},
&locale_time,
"C",
check_locale_time, assign_locale_time, NULL
},
{
{"shared_preload_libraries", PGC_POSTMASTER, RESOURCES_KERNEL,
gettext_noop("Lists shared libraries to preload into server."),
NULL,
GUC_LIST_INPUT | GUC_LIST_QUOTE | GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&shared_preload_libraries_string,
"",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"local_preload_libraries", PGC_BACKEND, CLIENT_CONN_OTHER,
gettext_noop("Lists shared libraries to preload into each backend."),
NULL,
GUC_LIST_INPUT | GUC_LIST_QUOTE
},
&local_preload_libraries_string,
"",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"search_path", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the schema search order for names that are not schema-qualified."),
NULL,
GUC_LIST_INPUT | GUC_LIST_QUOTE
},
&namespace_search_path,
"\"$user\",public",
check_search_path, assign_search_path, NULL
},
{
/* Can't be set in postgresql.conf */
{"server_encoding", PGC_INTERNAL, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets the server (database) character set encoding."),
NULL,
GUC_IS_NAME | GUC_REPORT | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&server_encoding_string,
"SQL_ASCII",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
/* Can't be set in postgresql.conf */
{"server_version", PGC_INTERNAL, PRESET_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Shows the server version."),
NULL,
GUC_REPORT | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&server_version_string,
PG_VERSION,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
/* Not for general use --- used by SET ROLE */
{"role", PGC_USERSET, UNGROUPED,
gettext_noop("Sets the current role."),
NULL,
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
GUC_IS_NAME | GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL | GUC_NO_RESET_ALL | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE | GUC_NOT_WHILE_SEC_REST
},
&role_string,
"none",
check_role, assign_role, show_role
},
{
/* Not for general use --- used by SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION */
{"session_authorization", PGC_USERSET, UNGROUPED,
gettext_noop("Sets the session user name."),
NULL,
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
GUC_IS_NAME | GUC_REPORT | GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL | GUC_NO_RESET_ALL | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE | GUC_NOT_WHILE_SEC_REST
},
&session_authorization_string,
NULL,
check_session_authorization, assign_session_authorization, NULL
},
{
{"log_destination", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHERE,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
gettext_noop("Sets the destination for server log output."),
gettext_noop("Valid values are combinations of \"stderr\", "
"\"syslog\", \"csvlog\", and \"eventlog\", "
"depending on the platform."),
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
GUC_LIST_INPUT
},
&log_destination_string,
"stderr",
check_log_destination, assign_log_destination, NULL
},
{
{"log_directory", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHERE,
gettext_noop("Sets the destination directory for log files."),
gettext_noop("Can be specified as relative to the data directory "
"or as absolute path."),
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&Log_directory,
"pg_log",
check_canonical_path, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_filename", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHERE,
gettext_noop("Sets the file name pattern for log files."),
NULL,
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&Log_filename,
"postgresql-%Y-%m-%d_%H%M%S.log",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"syslog_ident", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHERE,
gettext_noop("Sets the program name used to identify PostgreSQL "
"messages in syslog."),
NULL
},
&syslog_ident_str,
"postgres",
NULL, assign_syslog_ident, NULL
},
{
{"TimeZone", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets the time zone for displaying and interpreting time stamps."),
NULL,
GUC_REPORT
},
&timezone_string,
"GMT",
check_timezone, assign_timezone, show_timezone
},
{
{"timezone_abbreviations", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Selects a file of time zone abbreviations."),
NULL
},
&timezone_abbreviations_string,
NULL,
check_timezone_abbreviations, assign_timezone_abbreviations, NULL
},
{
{"transaction_isolation", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the current transaction's isolation level."),
NULL,
GUC_NO_RESET_ALL | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE
},
&XactIsoLevel_string,
"default",
check_XactIsoLevel, assign_XactIsoLevel, show_XactIsoLevel
},
{
{"unix_socket_group", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the owning group of the Unix-domain socket."),
gettext_noop("The owning user of the socket is always the user "
"that starts the server.")
},
&Unix_socket_group,
"",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"unix_socket_directory", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the directory where the Unix-domain socket will be created."),
NULL,
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&UnixSocketDir,
"",
check_canonical_path, NULL, NULL
},
UUNET is looking into offering PostgreSQL as a part of a managed web hosting product, on both shared and dedicated machines. We currently offer Oracle and MySQL, and it would be a nice middle-ground. However, as shipped, PostgreSQL lacks the following features we need that MySQL has: 1. The ability to listen only on a particular IP address. Each hosting customer has their own IP address, on which all of their servers (http, ftp, real media, etc.) run. 2. The ability to place the Unix-domain socket in a mode 700 directory. This allows us to automatically create an empty database, with an empty DBA password, for new or upgrading customers without having to interactively set a DBA password and communicate it to (or from) the customer. This in turn cuts down our install and upgrade times. 3. The ability to connect to the Unix-domain socket from within a change-rooted environment. We run CGI programs chrooted to the user's home directory, which is another reason why we need to be able to specify where the Unix-domain socket is, instead of /tmp. 4. The ability to, if run as root, open a pid file in /var/run as root, and then setuid to the desired user. (mysqld -u can almost do this; I had to patch it, too). The patch below fixes problem 1-3. I plan to address #4, also, but haven't done so yet. These diffs are big enough that they should give the PG development team something to think about in the meantime :-) Also, I'm about to leave for 2 weeks' vacation, so I thought I'd get out what I have, which works (for the problems it tackles), now. With these changes, we can set up and run PostgreSQL with scripts the same way we can with apache or proftpd or mysql. In summary, this patch makes the following enhancements: 1. Adds an environment variable PGUNIXSOCKET, analogous to MYSQL_UNIX_PORT, and command line options -k --unix-socket to the relevant programs. 2. Adds a -h option to postmaster to set the hostname or IP address to listen on instead of the default INADDR_ANY. 3. Extends some library interfaces to support the above. 4. Fixes a few memory leaks in PQconnectdb(). The default behavior is unchanged from stock 7.0.2; if you don't use any of these new features, they don't change the operation. David J. MacKenzie
2000-11-13 16:18:15 +01:00
{
{"listen_addresses", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the host name or IP address(es) to listen to."),
NULL,
GUC_LIST_INPUT
},
&ListenAddresses,
"localhost",
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
UUNET is looking into offering PostgreSQL as a part of a managed web hosting product, on both shared and dedicated machines. We currently offer Oracle and MySQL, and it would be a nice middle-ground. However, as shipped, PostgreSQL lacks the following features we need that MySQL has: 1. The ability to listen only on a particular IP address. Each hosting customer has their own IP address, on which all of their servers (http, ftp, real media, etc.) run. 2. The ability to place the Unix-domain socket in a mode 700 directory. This allows us to automatically create an empty database, with an empty DBA password, for new or upgrading customers without having to interactively set a DBA password and communicate it to (or from) the customer. This in turn cuts down our install and upgrade times. 3. The ability to connect to the Unix-domain socket from within a change-rooted environment. We run CGI programs chrooted to the user's home directory, which is another reason why we need to be able to specify where the Unix-domain socket is, instead of /tmp. 4. The ability to, if run as root, open a pid file in /var/run as root, and then setuid to the desired user. (mysqld -u can almost do this; I had to patch it, too). The patch below fixes problem 1-3. I plan to address #4, also, but haven't done so yet. These diffs are big enough that they should give the PG development team something to think about in the meantime :-) Also, I'm about to leave for 2 weeks' vacation, so I thought I'd get out what I have, which works (for the problems it tackles), now. With these changes, we can set up and run PostgreSQL with scripts the same way we can with apache or proftpd or mysql. In summary, this patch makes the following enhancements: 1. Adds an environment variable PGUNIXSOCKET, analogous to MYSQL_UNIX_PORT, and command line options -k --unix-socket to the relevant programs. 2. Adds a -h option to postmaster to set the hostname or IP address to listen on instead of the default INADDR_ANY. 3. Extends some library interfaces to support the above. 4. Fixes a few memory leaks in PQconnectdb(). The default behavior is unchanged from stock 7.0.2; if you don't use any of these new features, they don't change the operation. David J. MacKenzie
2000-11-13 16:18:15 +01:00
{
{"data_directory", PGC_POSTMASTER, FILE_LOCATIONS,
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
gettext_noop("Sets the server's data directory."),
NULL,
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&data_directory,
NULL,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"config_file", PGC_POSTMASTER, FILE_LOCATIONS,
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
gettext_noop("Sets the server's main configuration file."),
NULL,
GUC_DISALLOW_IN_FILE | GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&ConfigFileName,
NULL,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"hba_file", PGC_POSTMASTER, FILE_LOCATIONS,
gettext_noop("Sets the server's \"hba\" configuration file."),
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
NULL,
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&HbaFileName,
NULL,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"ident_file", PGC_POSTMASTER, FILE_LOCATIONS,
gettext_noop("Sets the server's \"ident\" configuration file."),
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
NULL,
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&IdentFileName,
NULL,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"external_pid_file", PGC_POSTMASTER, FILE_LOCATIONS,
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
gettext_noop("Writes the postmaster PID to the specified file."),
NULL,
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&external_pid_file,
NULL,
check_canonical_path, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"stats_temp_directory", PGC_SIGHUP, STATS_COLLECTOR,
gettext_noop("Writes temporary statistics files to the specified directory."),
NULL,
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&pgstat_temp_directory,
"pg_stat_tmp",
check_canonical_path, assign_pgstat_temp_directory, NULL
},
{
{"synchronous_standby_names", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_MASTER,
2011-07-04 23:01:35 +02:00
gettext_noop("List of names of potential synchronous standbys."),
NULL,
GUC_LIST_INPUT
},
&SyncRepStandbyNames,
"",
check_synchronous_standby_names, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"default_text_search_config", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets default text search configuration."),
NULL
},
&TSCurrentConfig,
"pg_catalog.simple",
check_TSCurrentConfig, assign_TSCurrentConfig, NULL
},
{
{"ssl_ciphers", PGC_POSTMASTER, CONN_AUTH_SECURITY,
gettext_noop("Sets the list of allowed SSL ciphers."),
NULL,
GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
},
&SSLCipherSuites,
#ifdef USE_SSL
"ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH",
#else
"none",
#endif
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
2007-02-16 18:07:00 +01:00
{
{"application_name", PGC_USERSET, LOGGING_WHAT,
2010-02-26 03:01:40 +01:00
gettext_noop("Sets the application name to be reported in statistics and logs."),
NULL,
GUC_IS_NAME | GUC_REPORT | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&application_name,
"",
check_application_name, assign_application_name, NULL
},
/* End-of-list marker */
{
{NULL, 0, 0, NULL, NULL}, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL
}
};
static struct config_enum ConfigureNamesEnum[] =
{
{
{"backslash_quote", PGC_USERSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS,
gettext_noop("Sets whether \"\\'\" is allowed in string literals."),
NULL
},
&backslash_quote,
BACKSLASH_QUOTE_SAFE_ENCODING, backslash_quote_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"bytea_output", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the output format for bytea."),
NULL
},
&bytea_output,
BYTEA_OUTPUT_HEX, bytea_output_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"client_min_messages", PGC_USERSET, LOGGING_WHEN,
gettext_noop("Sets the message levels that are sent to the client."),
gettext_noop("Each level includes all the levels that follow it. The later"
" the level, the fewer messages are sent.")
},
&client_min_messages,
NOTICE, client_message_level_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"constraint_exclusion", PGC_USERSET, QUERY_TUNING_OTHER,
gettext_noop("Enables the planner to use constraints to optimize queries."),
gettext_noop("Table scans will be skipped if their constraints"
" guarantee that no rows match the query.")
},
&constraint_exclusion,
CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_PARTITION, constraint_exclusion_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"default_transaction_isolation", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the transaction isolation level of each new transaction."),
NULL
},
&DefaultXactIsoLevel,
XACT_READ_COMMITTED, isolation_level_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"IntervalStyle", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
gettext_noop("Sets the display format for interval values."),
NULL,
GUC_REPORT
},
&IntervalStyle,
INTSTYLE_POSTGRES, intervalstyle_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_error_verbosity", PGC_SUSET, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Sets the verbosity of logged messages."),
NULL
},
&Log_error_verbosity,
PGERROR_DEFAULT, log_error_verbosity_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_min_messages", PGC_SUSET, LOGGING_WHEN,
gettext_noop("Sets the message levels that are logged."),
gettext_noop("Each level includes all the levels that follow it. The later"
" the level, the fewer messages are sent.")
},
&log_min_messages,
WARNING, server_message_level_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_min_error_statement", PGC_SUSET, LOGGING_WHEN,
gettext_noop("Causes all statements generating error at or above this level to be logged."),
gettext_noop("Each level includes all the levels that follow it. The later"
" the level, the fewer messages are sent.")
},
&log_min_error_statement,
ERROR, server_message_level_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"log_statement", PGC_SUSET, LOGGING_WHAT,
gettext_noop("Sets the type of statements logged."),
NULL
},
&log_statement,
LOGSTMT_NONE, log_statement_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"syslog_facility", PGC_SIGHUP, LOGGING_WHERE,
gettext_noop("Sets the syslog \"facility\" to be used when syslog enabled."),
NULL
},
&syslog_facility,
#ifdef HAVE_SYSLOG
LOG_LOCAL0,
#else
0,
#endif
syslog_facility_options,
NULL, assign_syslog_facility, NULL
},
{
{"session_replication_role", PGC_SUSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets the session's behavior for triggers and rewrite rules."),
NULL
},
&SessionReplicationRole,
SESSION_REPLICATION_ROLE_ORIGIN, session_replication_role_options,
NULL, assign_session_replication_role, NULL
},
{
{"synchronous_commit", PGC_USERSET, WAL_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Sets the current transaction's synchronization level."),
NULL
},
&synchronous_commit,
SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_ON, synchronous_commit_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
{
{"trace_recovery_messages", PGC_SIGHUP, DEVELOPER_OPTIONS,
gettext_noop("Enables logging of recovery-related debugging information."),
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
gettext_noop("Each level includes all the levels that follow it. The later"
" the level, the fewer messages are sent.")
},
&trace_recovery_messages,
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
/*
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
* client_message_level_options allows too many values, really, but
* it's not worth having a separate options array for this.
*/
LOG, client_message_level_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
Allow read only connections during recovery, known as Hot Standby. Enabled by recovery_connections = on (default) and forcing archive recovery using a recovery.conf. Recovery processing now emulates the original transactions as they are replayed, providing full locking and MVCC behaviour for read only queries. Recovery must enter consistent state before connections are allowed, so there is a delay, typically short, before connections succeed. Replay of recovering transactions can conflict and in some cases deadlock with queries during recovery; these result in query cancellation after max_standby_delay seconds have expired. Infrastructure changes have minor effects on normal running, though introduce four new types of WAL record. New test mode "make standbycheck" allows regression tests of static command behaviour on a standby server while in recovery. Typical and extreme dynamic behaviours have been checked via code inspection and manual testing. Few port specific behaviours have been utilised, though primary testing has been on Linux only so far. This commit is the basic patch. Additional changes will follow in this release to enhance some aspects of behaviour, notably improved handling of conflicts, deadlock detection and query cancellation. Changes to VACUUM FULL are also required. Simon Riggs, with significant and lengthy review by Heikki Linnakangas, including streamlined redesign of snapshot creation and two-phase commit. Important contributions from Florian Pflug, Mark Kirkwood, Merlin Moncure, Greg Stark, Gianni Ciolli, Gabriele Bartolini, Hannu Krosing, Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Hiroyuki Yamada plus support and feedback from many other community members.
2009-12-19 02:32:45 +01:00
},
{
{"track_functions", PGC_SUSET, STATS_COLLECTOR,
gettext_noop("Collects function-level statistics on database activity."),
NULL
},
&pgstat_track_functions,
TRACK_FUNC_OFF, track_function_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"wal_level", PGC_POSTMASTER, WAL_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Set the level of information written to the WAL."),
NULL
},
&wal_level,
WAL_LEVEL_MINIMAL, wal_level_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
2008-05-12 10:35:05 +02:00
{
{"wal_sync_method", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("Selects the method used for forcing WAL updates to disk."),
NULL
},
&sync_method,
DEFAULT_SYNC_METHOD, sync_method_options,
NULL, assign_xlog_sync_method, NULL
2008-05-12 10:35:05 +02:00
},
{
{"xmlbinary", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets how binary values are to be encoded in XML."),
NULL
},
&xmlbinary,
XMLBINARY_BASE64, xmlbinary_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
{
{"xmloption", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_STATEMENT,
gettext_noop("Sets whether XML data in implicit parsing and serialization "
"operations is to be considered as documents or content fragments."),
NULL
},
&xmloption,
XMLOPTION_CONTENT, xmloption_options,
NULL, NULL, NULL
},
/* End-of-list marker */
{
{NULL, 0, 0, NULL, NULL}, NULL, 0, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL
}
};
/******** end of options list ********/
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/*
* To allow continued support of obsolete names for GUC variables, we apply
* the following mappings to any unrecognized name. Note that an old name
* should be mapped to a new one only if the new variable has very similar
* semantics to the old.
*/
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
static const char *const map_old_guc_names[] = {
"sort_mem", "work_mem",
"vacuum_mem", "maintenance_work_mem",
NULL
};
/*
* Actual lookup of variables is done through this single, sorted array.
*/
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
static struct config_generic **guc_variables;
/* Current number of variables contained in the vector */
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
static int num_guc_variables;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
/* Vector capacity */
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
static int size_guc_variables;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
static bool guc_dirty; /* TRUE if need to do commit/abort work */
static bool reporting_enabled; /* TRUE to enable GUC_REPORT */
static int GUCNestLevel = 0; /* 1 when in main transaction */
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
static int guc_var_compare(const void *a, const void *b);
static int guc_name_compare(const char *namea, const char *nameb);
Split PGC_S_DEFAULT into two values, for true boot_val vs computed default. Failure to distinguish these cases is the real cause behind the recent reports of Windows builds crashing on 'infinity'::timestamp, which was directly due to failure to establish a value of timezone_abbreviations in postmaster child processes. The postmaster had the desired value, but write_one_nondefault_variable() didn't transmit it to backends. To fix that, invent a new value PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT, and be sure to use that or PGC_S_ENV_VAR (as appropriate) for "default" settings that are computed during initialization. (We need both because there's at least one variable that could receive a value from either source.) This commit also fixes ProcessConfigFile's failure to restore the correct default value for certain GUC variables if they are set in postgresql.conf and then removed/commented out of the file. We have to recompute and reinstall the value for any GUC variable that could have received a value from PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT or PGC_S_ENV_VAR sources, and there were a number of oversights. (That whole thing is a crock that needs to be redesigned, but not today.) However, I intentionally didn't make it work "exactly right" for the cases of timezone and log_timezone. The exactly right behavior would involve running select_default_timezone, which we'd have to do independently in each postgres process, causing the whole database to become entirely unresponsive for as much as several seconds. That didn't seem like a good idea, especially since the variable's removal from postgresql.conf might be just an accidental edit. Instead the behavior is to adopt the previously active setting as if it were default. Note that this patch creates an ABI break for extensions that use any of the PGC_S_XXX constants; they'll need to be recompiled.
2011-05-12 01:57:38 +02:00
static void InitializeGUCOptionsFromEnvironment(void);
static void InitializeOneGUCOption(struct config_generic * gconf);
static void push_old_value(struct config_generic * gconf, GucAction action);
static void ReportGUCOption(struct config_generic * record);
static void ShowGUCConfigOption(const char *name, DestReceiver *dest);
static void ShowAllGUCConfig(DestReceiver *dest);
static char *_ShowOption(struct config_generic * record, bool use_units);
static bool validate_option_array_item(const char *name, const char *value,
2010-07-06 21:19:02 +02:00
bool skipIfNoPermissions);
/*
* Some infrastructure for checking malloc/strdup/realloc calls
*/
static void *
guc_malloc(int elevel, size_t size)
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
void *data;
data = malloc(size);
if (data == NULL)
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY),
errmsg("out of memory")));
return data;
}
static void *
guc_realloc(int elevel, void *old, size_t size)
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
void *data;
data = realloc(old, size);
if (data == NULL)
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY),
errmsg("out of memory")));
return data;
}
static char *
guc_strdup(int elevel, const char *src)
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
char *data;
data = strdup(src);
if (data == NULL)
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY),
errmsg("out of memory")));
return data;
}
/*
* Detect whether strval is referenced anywhere in a GUC string item
*/
static bool
string_field_used(struct config_string * conf, char *strval)
{
GucStack *stack;
if (strval == *(conf->variable) ||
strval == conf->reset_val ||
strval == conf->boot_val)
return true;
for (stack = conf->gen.stack; stack; stack = stack->prev)
{
if (strval == stack->prior.val.stringval ||
strval == stack->masked.val.stringval)
return true;
}
return false;
}
/*
* Support for assigning to a field of a string GUC item. Free the prior
* value if it's not referenced anywhere else in the item (including stacked
* states).
*/
static void
set_string_field(struct config_string * conf, char **field, char *newval)
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
char *oldval = *field;
/* Do the assignment */
*field = newval;
/* Free old value if it's not NULL and isn't referenced anymore */
if (oldval && !string_field_used(conf, oldval))
free(oldval);
}
/*
* Detect whether an "extra" struct is referenced anywhere in a GUC item
*/
static bool
extra_field_used(struct config_generic * gconf, void *extra)
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
GucStack *stack;
if (extra == gconf->extra)
return true;
switch (gconf->vartype)
{
case PGC_BOOL:
if (extra == ((struct config_bool *) gconf)->reset_extra)
return true;
break;
case PGC_INT:
if (extra == ((struct config_int *) gconf)->reset_extra)
return true;
break;
case PGC_REAL:
if (extra == ((struct config_real *) gconf)->reset_extra)
return true;
break;
case PGC_STRING:
if (extra == ((struct config_string *) gconf)->reset_extra)
return true;
break;
case PGC_ENUM:
if (extra == ((struct config_enum *) gconf)->reset_extra)
return true;
break;
}
for (stack = gconf->stack; stack; stack = stack->prev)
{
if (extra == stack->prior.extra ||
extra == stack->masked.extra)
return true;
}
return false;
}
/*
* Support for assigning to an "extra" field of a GUC item. Free the prior
* value if it's not referenced anywhere else in the item (including stacked
* states).
*/
static void
set_extra_field(struct config_generic * gconf, void **field, void *newval)
{
void *oldval = *field;
/* Do the assignment */
*field = newval;
/* Free old value if it's not NULL and isn't referenced anymore */
if (oldval && !extra_field_used(gconf, oldval))
free(oldval);
}
/*
* Support for copying a variable's active value into a stack entry.
* The "extra" field associated with the active value is copied, too.
*
* NB: be sure stringval and extra fields of a new stack entry are
* initialized to NULL before this is used, else we'll try to free() them.
*/
static void
set_stack_value(struct config_generic * gconf, config_var_value *val)
{
switch (gconf->vartype)
{
case PGC_BOOL:
val->val.boolval =
*((struct config_bool *) gconf)->variable;
break;
case PGC_INT:
val->val.intval =
*((struct config_int *) gconf)->variable;
break;
case PGC_REAL:
val->val.realval =
*((struct config_real *) gconf)->variable;
break;
case PGC_STRING:
set_string_field((struct config_string *) gconf,
&(val->val.stringval),
*((struct config_string *) gconf)->variable);
break;
case PGC_ENUM:
val->val.enumval =
*((struct config_enum *) gconf)->variable;
break;
}
set_extra_field(gconf, &(val->extra), gconf->extra);
}
/*
* Support for discarding a no-longer-needed value in a stack entry.
* The "extra" field associated with the stack entry is cleared, too.
*/
static void
discard_stack_value(struct config_generic * gconf, config_var_value *val)
{
switch (gconf->vartype)
{
case PGC_BOOL:
case PGC_INT:
case PGC_REAL:
case PGC_ENUM:
/* no need to do anything */
break;
case PGC_STRING:
set_string_field((struct config_string *) gconf,
&(val->val.stringval),
NULL);
break;
}
set_extra_field(gconf, &(val->extra), NULL);
}
/*
* Fetch the sorted array pointer (exported for help_config.c's use ONLY)
*/
struct config_generic **
get_guc_variables(void)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
return guc_variables;
}
/*
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
* Build the sorted array. This is split out so that it could be
* re-executed after startup (eg, we could allow loadable modules to
* add vars, and then we'd need to re-sort).
*/
void
build_guc_variables(void)
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
int size_vars;
int num_vars = 0;
struct config_generic **guc_vars;
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
int i;
for (i = 0; ConfigureNamesBool[i].gen.name; i++)
{
struct config_bool *conf = &ConfigureNamesBool[i];
/* Rather than requiring vartype to be filled in by hand, do this: */
conf->gen.vartype = PGC_BOOL;
num_vars++;
}
for (i = 0; ConfigureNamesInt[i].gen.name; i++)
{
struct config_int *conf = &ConfigureNamesInt[i];
conf->gen.vartype = PGC_INT;
num_vars++;
}
for (i = 0; ConfigureNamesReal[i].gen.name; i++)
{
struct config_real *conf = &ConfigureNamesReal[i];
conf->gen.vartype = PGC_REAL;
num_vars++;
}
for (i = 0; ConfigureNamesString[i].gen.name; i++)
{
struct config_string *conf = &ConfigureNamesString[i];
conf->gen.vartype = PGC_STRING;
num_vars++;
}
for (i = 0; ConfigureNamesEnum[i].gen.name; i++)
{
struct config_enum *conf = &ConfigureNamesEnum[i];
conf->gen.vartype = PGC_ENUM;
num_vars++;
}
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/*
* Create table with 20% slack
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
*/
size_vars = num_vars + num_vars / 4;
guc_vars = (struct config_generic **)
guc_malloc(FATAL, size_vars * sizeof(struct config_generic *));
num_vars = 0;
for (i = 0; ConfigureNamesBool[i].gen.name; i++)
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
guc_vars[num_vars++] = &ConfigureNamesBool[i].gen;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
for (i = 0; ConfigureNamesInt[i].gen.name; i++)
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
guc_vars[num_vars++] = &ConfigureNamesInt[i].gen;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
for (i = 0; ConfigureNamesReal[i].gen.name; i++)
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
guc_vars[num_vars++] = &ConfigureNamesReal[i].gen;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
for (i = 0; ConfigureNamesString[i].gen.name; i++)
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
guc_vars[num_vars++] = &ConfigureNamesString[i].gen;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
for (i = 0; ConfigureNamesEnum[i].gen.name; i++)
guc_vars[num_vars++] = &ConfigureNamesEnum[i].gen;
if (guc_variables)
free(guc_variables);
guc_variables = guc_vars;
num_guc_variables = num_vars;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
size_guc_variables = size_vars;
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
qsort((void *) guc_variables, num_guc_variables,
sizeof(struct config_generic *), guc_var_compare);
}
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
/*
* Add a new GUC variable to the list of known variables. The
* list is expanded if needed.
*/
static bool
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
add_guc_variable(struct config_generic * var, int elevel)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
if (num_guc_variables + 1 >= size_guc_variables)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/*
* Increase the vector by 25%
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
*/
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
int size_vars = size_guc_variables + size_guc_variables / 4;
struct config_generic **guc_vars;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
if (size_vars == 0)
{
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
size_vars = 100;
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
guc_vars = (struct config_generic **)
guc_malloc(elevel, size_vars * sizeof(struct config_generic *));
}
else
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
guc_vars = (struct config_generic **)
guc_realloc(elevel, guc_variables, size_vars * sizeof(struct config_generic *));
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
}
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
if (guc_vars == NULL)
return false; /* out of memory */
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
guc_variables = guc_vars;
size_guc_variables = size_vars;
}
guc_variables[num_guc_variables++] = var;
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
qsort((void *) guc_variables, num_guc_variables,
sizeof(struct config_generic *), guc_var_compare);
return true;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
}
/*
* Create and add a placeholder variable for a custom variable name.
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
*/
static struct config_generic *
add_placeholder_variable(const char *name, int elevel)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
size_t sz = sizeof(struct config_string) + sizeof(char *);
struct config_string *var;
struct config_generic *gen;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
var = (struct config_string *) guc_malloc(elevel, sz);
if (var == NULL)
return NULL;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
memset(var, 0, sz);
gen = &var->gen;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
gen->name = guc_strdup(elevel, name);
if (gen->name == NULL)
{
free(var);
return NULL;
}
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
gen->context = PGC_USERSET;
gen->group = CUSTOM_OPTIONS;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
gen->short_desc = "GUC placeholder variable";
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
gen->flags = GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE | GUC_CUSTOM_PLACEHOLDER;
gen->vartype = PGC_STRING;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/*
* The char* is allocated at the end of the struct since we have no
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
* 'static' place to point to. Note that the current value, as well as
* the boot and reset values, start out NULL.
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
*/
var->variable = (char **) (var + 1);
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
if (!add_guc_variable((struct config_generic *) var, elevel))
{
free((void *) gen->name);
free(var);
return NULL;
}
return gen;
}
/*
* Look up option NAME. If it exists, return a pointer to its record,
* else return NULL. If create_placeholders is TRUE, we'll create a
* placeholder record for a valid-looking custom variable name.
*/
static struct config_generic *
find_option(const char *name, bool create_placeholders, int elevel)
{
const char **key = &name;
struct config_generic **res;
int i;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
Assert(name);
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* By equating const char ** with struct config_generic *, we are assuming
* the name field is first in config_generic.
*/
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
res = (struct config_generic **) bsearch((void *) &key,
(void *) guc_variables,
num_guc_variables,
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
sizeof(struct config_generic *),
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
guc_var_compare);
if (res)
return *res;
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* See if the name is an obsolete name for a variable. We assume that the
* set of supported old names is short enough that a brute-force search is
* the best way.
*/
for (i = 0; map_old_guc_names[i] != NULL; i += 2)
{
if (guc_name_compare(name, map_old_guc_names[i]) == 0)
return find_option(map_old_guc_names[i + 1], false, elevel);
}
if (create_placeholders)
{
/*
* Check if the name is qualified, and if so, add a placeholder.
*/
if (strchr(name, GUC_QUALIFIER_SEPARATOR) != NULL)
return add_placeholder_variable(name, elevel);
}
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
/* Unknown name */
return NULL;
}
/*
* comparator for qsorting and bsearching guc_variables array
*/
static int
guc_var_compare(const void *a, const void *b)
{
struct config_generic *confa = *(struct config_generic **) a;
struct config_generic *confb = *(struct config_generic **) b;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
return guc_name_compare(confa->name, confb->name);
}
/*
* the bare comparison function for GUC names
*/
static int
guc_name_compare(const char *namea, const char *nameb)
{
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* The temptation to use strcasecmp() here must be resisted, because the
* array ordering has to remain stable across setlocale() calls. So, build
* our own with a simple ASCII-only downcasing.
*/
while (*namea && *nameb)
{
char cha = *namea++;
char chb = *nameb++;
if (cha >= 'A' && cha <= 'Z')
cha += 'a' - 'A';
if (chb >= 'A' && chb <= 'Z')
chb += 'a' - 'A';
if (cha != chb)
return cha - chb;
}
if (*namea)
return 1; /* a is longer */
if (*nameb)
return -1; /* b is longer */
return 0;
}
/*
* Initialize GUC options during program startup.
*
* Note that we cannot read the config file yet, since we have not yet
* processed command-line switches.
*/
void
InitializeGUCOptions(void)
{
int i;
/*
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
* Before log_line_prefix could possibly receive a nonempty setting, make
* sure that timezone processing is minimally alive (see elog.c).
*/
pg_timezone_initialize();
/*
* Build sorted array of all GUC variables.
*/
build_guc_variables();
/*
* Load all variables with their compiled-in defaults, and initialize
* status fields as needed.
*/
for (i = 0; i < num_guc_variables; i++)
{
InitializeOneGUCOption(guc_variables[i]);
}
guc_dirty = false;
reporting_enabled = false;
/*
* Prevent any attempt to override the transaction modes from
* non-interactive sources.
*/
SetConfigOption("transaction_isolation", "default",
PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
SetConfigOption("transaction_read_only", "no",
PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
SetConfigOption("transaction_deferrable", "no",
PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* For historical reasons, some GUC parameters can receive defaults from
Split PGC_S_DEFAULT into two values, for true boot_val vs computed default. Failure to distinguish these cases is the real cause behind the recent reports of Windows builds crashing on 'infinity'::timestamp, which was directly due to failure to establish a value of timezone_abbreviations in postmaster child processes. The postmaster had the desired value, but write_one_nondefault_variable() didn't transmit it to backends. To fix that, invent a new value PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT, and be sure to use that or PGC_S_ENV_VAR (as appropriate) for "default" settings that are computed during initialization. (We need both because there's at least one variable that could receive a value from either source.) This commit also fixes ProcessConfigFile's failure to restore the correct default value for certain GUC variables if they are set in postgresql.conf and then removed/commented out of the file. We have to recompute and reinstall the value for any GUC variable that could have received a value from PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT or PGC_S_ENV_VAR sources, and there were a number of oversights. (That whole thing is a crock that needs to be redesigned, but not today.) However, I intentionally didn't make it work "exactly right" for the cases of timezone and log_timezone. The exactly right behavior would involve running select_default_timezone, which we'd have to do independently in each postgres process, causing the whole database to become entirely unresponsive for as much as several seconds. That didn't seem like a good idea, especially since the variable's removal from postgresql.conf might be just an accidental edit. Instead the behavior is to adopt the previously active setting as if it were default. Note that this patch creates an ABI break for extensions that use any of the PGC_S_XXX constants; they'll need to be recompiled.
2011-05-12 01:57:38 +02:00
* environment variables. Process those settings.
*/
Split PGC_S_DEFAULT into two values, for true boot_val vs computed default. Failure to distinguish these cases is the real cause behind the recent reports of Windows builds crashing on 'infinity'::timestamp, which was directly due to failure to establish a value of timezone_abbreviations in postmaster child processes. The postmaster had the desired value, but write_one_nondefault_variable() didn't transmit it to backends. To fix that, invent a new value PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT, and be sure to use that or PGC_S_ENV_VAR (as appropriate) for "default" settings that are computed during initialization. (We need both because there's at least one variable that could receive a value from either source.) This commit also fixes ProcessConfigFile's failure to restore the correct default value for certain GUC variables if they are set in postgresql.conf and then removed/commented out of the file. We have to recompute and reinstall the value for any GUC variable that could have received a value from PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT or PGC_S_ENV_VAR sources, and there were a number of oversights. (That whole thing is a crock that needs to be redesigned, but not today.) However, I intentionally didn't make it work "exactly right" for the cases of timezone and log_timezone. The exactly right behavior would involve running select_default_timezone, which we'd have to do independently in each postgres process, causing the whole database to become entirely unresponsive for as much as several seconds. That didn't seem like a good idea, especially since the variable's removal from postgresql.conf might be just an accidental edit. Instead the behavior is to adopt the previously active setting as if it were default. Note that this patch creates an ABI break for extensions that use any of the PGC_S_XXX constants; they'll need to be recompiled.
2011-05-12 01:57:38 +02:00
InitializeGUCOptionsFromEnvironment();
}
/*
* Assign any GUC values that can come from the server's environment.
*
* This is called from InitializeGUCOptions, and also from ProcessConfigFile
* to deal with the possibility that a setting has been removed from
* postgresql.conf and should now get a value from the environment.
* (The latter is a kludge that should probably go away someday; if so,
* fold this back into InitializeGUCOptions.)
*/
static void
InitializeGUCOptionsFromEnvironment(void)
{
char *env;
long stack_rlimit;
env = getenv("PGPORT");
if (env != NULL)
SetConfigOption("port", env, PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_ENV_VAR);
env = getenv("PGDATESTYLE");
if (env != NULL)
SetConfigOption("datestyle", env, PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_ENV_VAR);
env = getenv("PGCLIENTENCODING");
if (env != NULL)
SetConfigOption("client_encoding", env, PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_ENV_VAR);
/*
* rlimit isn't exactly an "environment variable", but it behaves about
* the same. If we can identify the platform stack depth rlimit, increase
* default stack depth setting up to whatever is safe (but at most 2MB).
*/
stack_rlimit = get_stack_depth_rlimit();
if (stack_rlimit > 0)
{
long new_limit = (stack_rlimit - STACK_DEPTH_SLOP) / 1024L;
if (new_limit > 100)
{
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
char limbuf[16];
new_limit = Min(new_limit, 2048);
sprintf(limbuf, "%ld", new_limit);
SetConfigOption("max_stack_depth", limbuf,
PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_ENV_VAR);
}
}
}
/*
* Initialize one GUC option variable to its compiled-in default.
*
* Note: the reason for calling check_hooks is not that we think the boot_val
* might fail, but that the hooks might wish to compute an "extra" struct.
*/
static void
InitializeOneGUCOption(struct config_generic * gconf)
{
gconf->status = 0;
gconf->source = PGC_S_DEFAULT;
gconf->reset_source = PGC_S_DEFAULT;
gconf->scontext = PGC_INTERNAL;
gconf->reset_scontext = PGC_INTERNAL;
gconf->stack = NULL;
gconf->extra = NULL;
gconf->sourcefile = NULL;
gconf->sourceline = 0;
switch (gconf->vartype)
{
case PGC_BOOL:
{
struct config_bool *conf = (struct config_bool *) gconf;
bool newval = conf->boot_val;
void *extra = NULL;
if (!call_bool_check_hook(conf, &newval, &extra,
PGC_S_DEFAULT, LOG))
elog(FATAL, "failed to initialize %s to %d",
conf->gen.name, (int) newval);
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, extra);
*conf->variable = conf->reset_val = newval;
conf->gen.extra = conf->reset_extra = extra;
break;
}
case PGC_INT:
{
struct config_int *conf = (struct config_int *) gconf;
int newval = conf->boot_val;
void *extra = NULL;
Assert(newval >= conf->min);
Assert(newval <= conf->max);
if (!call_int_check_hook(conf, &newval, &extra,
PGC_S_DEFAULT, LOG))
elog(FATAL, "failed to initialize %s to %d",
conf->gen.name, newval);
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, extra);
*conf->variable = conf->reset_val = newval;
conf->gen.extra = conf->reset_extra = extra;
break;
}
case PGC_REAL:
{
struct config_real *conf = (struct config_real *) gconf;
double newval = conf->boot_val;
void *extra = NULL;
Assert(newval >= conf->min);
Assert(newval <= conf->max);
if (!call_real_check_hook(conf, &newval, &extra,
PGC_S_DEFAULT, LOG))
elog(FATAL, "failed to initialize %s to %g",
conf->gen.name, newval);
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, extra);
*conf->variable = conf->reset_val = newval;
conf->gen.extra = conf->reset_extra = extra;
break;
}
case PGC_STRING:
{
struct config_string *conf = (struct config_string *) gconf;
char *newval;
void *extra = NULL;
/* non-NULL boot_val must always get strdup'd */
if (conf->boot_val != NULL)
newval = guc_strdup(FATAL, conf->boot_val);
else
newval = NULL;
if (!call_string_check_hook(conf, &newval, &extra,
PGC_S_DEFAULT, LOG))
elog(FATAL, "failed to initialize %s to \"%s\"",
conf->gen.name, newval ? newval : "");
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, extra);
*conf->variable = conf->reset_val = newval;
conf->gen.extra = conf->reset_extra = extra;
break;
}
case PGC_ENUM:
{
struct config_enum *conf = (struct config_enum *) gconf;
int newval = conf->boot_val;
void *extra = NULL;
if (!call_enum_check_hook(conf, &newval, &extra,
PGC_S_DEFAULT, LOG))
elog(FATAL, "failed to initialize %s to %d",
conf->gen.name, newval);
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, extra);
*conf->variable = conf->reset_val = newval;
conf->gen.extra = conf->reset_extra = extra;
break;
}
}
}
/*
* Select the configuration files and data directory to be used, and
* do the initial read of postgresql.conf.
*
* This is called after processing command-line switches.
* userDoption is the -D switch value if any (NULL if unspecified).
* progname is just for use in error messages.
*
* Returns true on success; on failure, prints a suitable error message
* to stderr and returns false.
*/
bool
SelectConfigFiles(const char *userDoption, const char *progname)
{
char *configdir;
char *fname;
struct stat stat_buf;
/* configdir is -D option, or $PGDATA if no -D */
if (userDoption)
configdir = make_absolute_path(userDoption);
else
configdir = make_absolute_path(getenv("PGDATA"));
/*
* Find the configuration file: if config_file was specified on the
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* command line, use it, else use configdir/postgresql.conf. In any case
* ensure the result is an absolute path, so that it will be interpreted
* the same way by future backends.
*/
if (ConfigFileName)
fname = make_absolute_path(ConfigFileName);
2005-05-27 20:33:30 +02:00
else if (configdir)
{
fname = guc_malloc(FATAL,
strlen(configdir) + strlen(CONFIG_FILENAME) + 2);
sprintf(fname, "%s/%s", configdir, CONFIG_FILENAME);
}
else
{
write_stderr("%s does not know where to find the server configuration file.\n"
2004-10-12 23:54:45 +02:00
"You must specify the --config-file or -D invocation "
"option or set the PGDATA environment variable.\n",
progname);
return false;
}
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* Set the ConfigFileName GUC variable to its final value, ensuring that
* it can't be overridden later.
*/
SetConfigOption("config_file", fname, PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
free(fname);
/*
* Now read the config file for the first time.
*/
if (stat(ConfigFileName, &stat_buf) != 0)
{
write_stderr("%s cannot access the server configuration file \"%s\": %s\n",
progname, ConfigFileName, strerror(errno));
return false;
}
ProcessConfigFile(PGC_POSTMASTER);
/*
* If the data_directory GUC variable has been set, use that as DataDir;
* otherwise use configdir if set; else punt.
*
* Note: SetDataDir will copy and absolute-ize its argument, so we don't
* have to.
*/
if (data_directory)
SetDataDir(data_directory);
else if (configdir)
SetDataDir(configdir);
else
{
write_stderr("%s does not know where to find the database system data.\n"
"This can be specified as \"data_directory\" in \"%s\", "
"or by the -D invocation option, or by the "
"PGDATA environment variable.\n",
progname, ConfigFileName);
return false;
}
/*
* Reflect the final DataDir value back into the data_directory GUC var.
* (If you are wondering why we don't just make them a single variable,
* it's because the EXEC_BACKEND case needs DataDir to be transmitted to
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* child backends specially. XXX is that still true? Given that we now
* chdir to DataDir, EXEC_BACKEND can read the config file without knowing
* DataDir in advance.)
*/
SetConfigOption("data_directory", DataDir, PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
/*
* If timezone_abbreviations wasn't set in the configuration file, install
* the default value. We do it this way because we can't safely install
* a "real" value until my_exec_path is set, which may not have happened
* when InitializeGUCOptions runs, so the bootstrap default value cannot
* be the real desired default.
*/
pg_timezone_abbrev_initialize();
/*
* Figure out where pg_hba.conf is, and make sure the path is absolute.
*/
if (HbaFileName)
fname = make_absolute_path(HbaFileName);
2005-05-27 20:33:30 +02:00
else if (configdir)
{
fname = guc_malloc(FATAL,
strlen(configdir) + strlen(HBA_FILENAME) + 2);
sprintf(fname, "%s/%s", configdir, HBA_FILENAME);
}
else
{
write_stderr("%s does not know where to find the \"hba\" configuration file.\n"
"This can be specified as \"hba_file\" in \"%s\", "
"or by the -D invocation option, or by the "
"PGDATA environment variable.\n",
progname, ConfigFileName);
return false;
}
SetConfigOption("hba_file", fname, PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
free(fname);
/*
* Likewise for pg_ident.conf.
*/
if (IdentFileName)
fname = make_absolute_path(IdentFileName);
2005-05-27 20:33:30 +02:00
else if (configdir)
{
fname = guc_malloc(FATAL,
strlen(configdir) + strlen(IDENT_FILENAME) + 2);
sprintf(fname, "%s/%s", configdir, IDENT_FILENAME);
}
else
{
write_stderr("%s does not know where to find the \"ident\" configuration file.\n"
"This can be specified as \"ident_file\" in \"%s\", "
"or by the -D invocation option, or by the "
"PGDATA environment variable.\n",
progname, ConfigFileName);
return false;
}
SetConfigOption("ident_file", fname, PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
free(fname);
free(configdir);
return true;
}
/*
* Reset all options to their saved default values (implements RESET ALL)
*/
void
ResetAllOptions(void)
{
int i;
for (i = 0; i < num_guc_variables; i++)
{
struct config_generic *gconf = guc_variables[i];
/* Don't reset non-SET-able values */
if (gconf->context != PGC_SUSET &&
gconf->context != PGC_USERSET)
continue;
/* Don't reset if special exclusion from RESET ALL */
if (gconf->flags & GUC_NO_RESET_ALL)
continue;
/* No need to reset if wasn't SET */
if (gconf->source <= PGC_S_OVERRIDE)
continue;
/* Save old value to support transaction abort */
push_old_value(gconf, GUC_ACTION_SET);
switch (gconf->vartype)
{
case PGC_BOOL:
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
{
struct config_bool *conf = (struct config_bool *) gconf;
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (conf->reset_val,
conf->reset_extra);
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
*conf->variable = conf->reset_val;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
conf->reset_extra);
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
break;
}
case PGC_INT:
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
{
struct config_int *conf = (struct config_int *) gconf;
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (conf->reset_val,
conf->reset_extra);
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
*conf->variable = conf->reset_val;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
conf->reset_extra);
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
break;
}
case PGC_REAL:
{
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
struct config_real *conf = (struct config_real *) gconf;
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (conf->reset_val,
conf->reset_extra);
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
*conf->variable = conf->reset_val;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
conf->reset_extra);
break;
}
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
case PGC_STRING:
{
struct config_string *conf = (struct config_string *) gconf;
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (conf->reset_val,
conf->reset_extra);
set_string_field(conf, conf->variable, conf->reset_val);
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
conf->reset_extra);
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
break;
}
case PGC_ENUM:
{
struct config_enum *conf = (struct config_enum *) gconf;
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (conf->reset_val,
conf->reset_extra);
*conf->variable = conf->reset_val;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
conf->reset_extra);
break;
}
}
gconf->source = gconf->reset_source;
gconf->scontext = gconf->reset_scontext;
if (gconf->flags & GUC_REPORT)
ReportGUCOption(gconf);
}
}
/*
* push_old_value
* Push previous state during transactional assignment to a GUC variable.
*/
static void
push_old_value(struct config_generic * gconf, GucAction action)
{
GucStack *stack;
/* If we're not inside a nest level, do nothing */
if (GUCNestLevel == 0)
return;
/* Do we already have a stack entry of the current nest level? */
stack = gconf->stack;
if (stack && stack->nest_level >= GUCNestLevel)
{
/* Yes, so adjust its state if necessary */
Assert(stack->nest_level == GUCNestLevel);
switch (action)
{
case GUC_ACTION_SET:
/* SET overrides any prior action at same nest level */
if (stack->state == GUC_SET_LOCAL)
{
/* must discard old masked value */
discard_stack_value(gconf, &stack->masked);
}
stack->state = GUC_SET;
break;
case GUC_ACTION_LOCAL:
if (stack->state == GUC_SET)
{
/* SET followed by SET LOCAL, remember SET's value */
stack->masked_scontext = gconf->scontext;
set_stack_value(gconf, &stack->masked);
stack->state = GUC_SET_LOCAL;
}
/* in all other cases, no change to stack entry */
break;
case GUC_ACTION_SAVE:
/* Could only have a prior SAVE of same variable */
Assert(stack->state == GUC_SAVE);
break;
}
Assert(guc_dirty); /* must be set already */
return;
}
/*
* Push a new stack entry
*
* We keep all the stack entries in TopTransactionContext for simplicity.
*/
stack = (GucStack *) MemoryContextAllocZero(TopTransactionContext,
sizeof(GucStack));
stack->prev = gconf->stack;
stack->nest_level = GUCNestLevel;
switch (action)
{
case GUC_ACTION_SET:
stack->state = GUC_SET;
break;
case GUC_ACTION_LOCAL:
stack->state = GUC_LOCAL;
break;
case GUC_ACTION_SAVE:
stack->state = GUC_SAVE;
break;
}
stack->source = gconf->source;
stack->scontext = gconf->scontext;
set_stack_value(gconf, &stack->prior);
gconf->stack = stack;
/* Ensure we remember to pop at end of xact */
guc_dirty = true;
}
/*
* Do GUC processing at main transaction start.
*/
void
AtStart_GUC(void)
{
/*
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
* The nest level should be 0 between transactions; if it isn't, somebody
* didn't call AtEOXact_GUC, or called it with the wrong nestLevel. We
* throw a warning but make no other effort to clean up.
*/
if (GUCNestLevel != 0)
elog(WARNING, "GUC nest level = %d at transaction start",
GUCNestLevel);
GUCNestLevel = 1;
}
/*
* Enter a new nesting level for GUC values. This is called at subtransaction
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
* start and when entering a function that has proconfig settings. NOTE that
* we must not risk error here, else subtransaction start will be unhappy.
*/
int
NewGUCNestLevel(void)
{
return ++GUCNestLevel;
}
/*
* Do GUC processing at transaction or subtransaction commit or abort, or
* when exiting a function that has proconfig settings. (The name is thus
* a bit of a misnomer; perhaps it should be ExitGUCNestLevel or some such.)
* During abort, we discard all GUC settings that were applied at nesting
* levels >= nestLevel. nestLevel == 1 corresponds to the main transaction.
*/
void
AtEOXact_GUC(bool isCommit, int nestLevel)
{
bool still_dirty;
int i;
/*
* Note: it's possible to get here with GUCNestLevel == nestLevel-1 during
* abort, if there is a failure during transaction start before
* AtStart_GUC is called.
*/
Assert(nestLevel > 0 &&
(nestLevel <= GUCNestLevel ||
(nestLevel == GUCNestLevel + 1 && !isCommit)));
/* Quick exit if nothing's changed in this transaction */
if (!guc_dirty)
{
GUCNestLevel = nestLevel - 1;
return;
}
still_dirty = false;
for (i = 0; i < num_guc_variables; i++)
{
struct config_generic *gconf = guc_variables[i];
GucStack *stack;
/*
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
* Process and pop each stack entry within the nest level. To
* simplify fmgr_security_definer(), we allow failure exit from a
* function-with-SET-options to be recovered at the surrounding
* transaction or subtransaction abort; so there could be more than
* one stack entry to pop.
*/
while ((stack = gconf->stack) != NULL &&
stack->nest_level >= nestLevel)
{
GucStack *prev = stack->prev;
bool restorePrior = false;
bool restoreMasked = false;
bool changed;
/*
* In this next bit, if we don't set either restorePrior or
* restoreMasked, we must "discard" any unwanted fields of the
* stack entries to avoid leaking memory. If we do set one of
* those flags, unused fields will be cleaned up after restoring.
*/
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
if (!isCommit) /* if abort, always restore prior value */
restorePrior = true;
else if (stack->state == GUC_SAVE)
restorePrior = true;
else if (stack->nest_level == 1)
{
/* transaction commit */
if (stack->state == GUC_SET_LOCAL)
restoreMasked = true;
else if (stack->state == GUC_SET)
{
/* we keep the current active value */
discard_stack_value(gconf, &stack->prior);
}
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
else /* must be GUC_LOCAL */
restorePrior = true;
}
else if (prev == NULL ||
prev->nest_level < stack->nest_level - 1)
{
/* decrement entry's level and do not pop it */
stack->nest_level--;
continue;
}
else
{
/*
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
* We have to merge this stack entry into prev. See README for
* discussion of this bit.
*/
switch (stack->state)
{
case GUC_SAVE:
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
Assert(false); /* can't get here */
case GUC_SET:
/* next level always becomes SET */
discard_stack_value(gconf, &stack->prior);
if (prev->state == GUC_SET_LOCAL)
discard_stack_value(gconf, &prev->masked);
prev->state = GUC_SET;
break;
case GUC_LOCAL:
if (prev->state == GUC_SET)
{
/* LOCAL migrates down */
prev->masked_scontext = stack->scontext;
prev->masked = stack->prior;
prev->state = GUC_SET_LOCAL;
}
else
{
/* else just forget this stack level */
discard_stack_value(gconf, &stack->prior);
}
break;
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
case GUC_SET_LOCAL:
/* prior state at this level no longer wanted */
discard_stack_value(gconf, &stack->prior);
/* copy down the masked state */
prev->masked_scontext = stack->masked_scontext;
if (prev->state == GUC_SET_LOCAL)
discard_stack_value(gconf, &prev->masked);
prev->masked = stack->masked;
prev->state = GUC_SET_LOCAL;
break;
}
}
changed = false;
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
if (restorePrior || restoreMasked)
{
/* Perform appropriate restoration of the stacked value */
config_var_value newvalue;
GucSource newsource;
GucContext newscontext;
if (restoreMasked)
{
newvalue = stack->masked;
newsource = PGC_S_SESSION;
newscontext = stack->masked_scontext;
}
else
{
newvalue = stack->prior;
newsource = stack->source;
newscontext = stack->scontext;
}
switch (gconf->vartype)
{
case PGC_BOOL:
{
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
struct config_bool *conf = (struct config_bool *) gconf;
bool newval = newvalue.val.boolval;
void *newextra = newvalue.extra;
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
if (*conf->variable != newval ||
conf->gen.extra != newextra)
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
{
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, newextra);
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
*conf->variable = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
newextra);
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
changed = true;
}
break;
}
case PGC_INT:
{
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
struct config_int *conf = (struct config_int *) gconf;
int newval = newvalue.val.intval;
void *newextra = newvalue.extra;
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
if (*conf->variable != newval ||
conf->gen.extra != newextra)
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
{
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, newextra);
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
*conf->variable = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
newextra);
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
changed = true;
}
break;
}
case PGC_REAL:
{
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
struct config_real *conf = (struct config_real *) gconf;
double newval = newvalue.val.realval;
void *newextra = newvalue.extra;
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
if (*conf->variable != newval ||
conf->gen.extra != newextra)
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
{
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, newextra);
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
*conf->variable = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
newextra);
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
changed = true;
}
break;
}
case PGC_STRING:
{
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
struct config_string *conf = (struct config_string *) gconf;
char *newval = newvalue.val.stringval;
void *newextra = newvalue.extra;
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
if (*conf->variable != newval ||
conf->gen.extra != newextra)
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
{
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, newextra);
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
set_string_field(conf, conf->variable, newval);
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
newextra);
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
changed = true;
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
}
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
/*
* Release stacked values if not used anymore. We
* could use discard_stack_value() here, but since
* we have type-specific code anyway, might as
* well inline it.
*/
set_string_field(conf, &stack->prior.val.stringval, NULL);
set_string_field(conf, &stack->masked.val.stringval, NULL);
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
break;
}
case PGC_ENUM:
{
struct config_enum *conf = (struct config_enum *) gconf;
int newval = newvalue.val.enumval;
void *newextra = newvalue.extra;
if (*conf->variable != newval ||
conf->gen.extra != newextra)
{
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, newextra);
*conf->variable = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
newextra);
changed = true;
}
break;
}
}
/*
* Release stacked extra values if not used anymore.
*/
set_extra_field(gconf, &(stack->prior.extra), NULL);
set_extra_field(gconf, &(stack->masked.extra), NULL);
/* And restore source information */
gconf->source = newsource;
gconf->scontext = newscontext;
}
/* Finish popping the state stack */
gconf->stack = prev;
pfree(stack);
/* Report new value if we changed it */
if (changed && (gconf->flags & GUC_REPORT))
ReportGUCOption(gconf);
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
} /* end of stack-popping loop */
if (stack != NULL)
still_dirty = true;
}
/* If there are no remaining stack entries, we can reset guc_dirty */
guc_dirty = still_dirty;
/* Update nesting level */
GUCNestLevel = nestLevel - 1;
}
/*
* Start up automatic reporting of changes to variables marked GUC_REPORT.
* This is executed at completion of backend startup.
*/
void
BeginReportingGUCOptions(void)
{
int i;
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* Don't do anything unless talking to an interactive frontend of protocol
* 3.0 or later.
*/
if (whereToSendOutput != DestRemote ||
PG_PROTOCOL_MAJOR(FrontendProtocol) < 3)
return;
reporting_enabled = true;
/* Transmit initial values of interesting variables */
for (i = 0; i < num_guc_variables; i++)
{
struct config_generic *conf = guc_variables[i];
if (conf->flags & GUC_REPORT)
ReportGUCOption(conf);
}
}
/*
* ReportGUCOption: if appropriate, transmit option value to frontend
*/
static void
ReportGUCOption(struct config_generic * record)
{
if (reporting_enabled && (record->flags & GUC_REPORT))
{
char *val = _ShowOption(record, false);
StringInfoData msgbuf;
pq_beginmessage(&msgbuf, 'S');
pq_sendstring(&msgbuf, record->name);
pq_sendstring(&msgbuf, val);
pq_endmessage(&msgbuf);
pfree(val);
}
}
/*
* Try to parse value as an integer. The accepted formats are the
* usual decimal, octal, or hexadecimal formats, optionally followed by
* a unit name if "flags" indicates a unit is allowed.
*
* If the string parses okay, return true, else false.
* If okay and result is not NULL, return the value in *result.
* If not okay and hintmsg is not NULL, *hintmsg is set to a suitable
* HINT message, or NULL if no hint provided.
*/
bool
parse_int(const char *value, int *result, int flags, const char **hintmsg)
{
int64 val;
char *endptr;
/* To suppress compiler warnings, always set output params */
if (result)
*result = 0;
if (hintmsg)
*hintmsg = NULL;
/* We assume here that int64 is at least as wide as long */
errno = 0;
val = strtol(value, &endptr, 0);
if (endptr == value)
return false; /* no HINT for integer syntax error */
if (errno == ERANGE || val != (int64) ((int32) val))
{
if (hintmsg)
*hintmsg = gettext_noop("Value exceeds integer range.");
return false;
}
/* allow whitespace between integer and unit */
while (isspace((unsigned char) *endptr))
endptr++;
/* Handle possible unit */
if (*endptr != '\0')
{
/*
* Note: the multiple-switch coding technique here is a bit tedious,
* but seems necessary to avoid intermediate-value overflows.
*/
if (flags & GUC_UNIT_MEMORY)
{
/* Set hint for use if no match or trailing garbage */
if (hintmsg)
*hintmsg = gettext_noop("Valid units for this parameter are \"kB\", \"MB\", and \"GB\".");
#if BLCKSZ < 1024 || BLCKSZ > (1024*1024)
#error BLCKSZ must be between 1KB and 1MB
#endif
#if XLOG_BLCKSZ < 1024 || XLOG_BLCKSZ > (1024*1024)
#error XLOG_BLCKSZ must be between 1KB and 1MB
2007-02-23 22:36:19 +01:00
#endif
if (strncmp(endptr, "kB", 2) == 0)
{
endptr += 2;
switch (flags & GUC_UNIT_MEMORY)
{
case GUC_UNIT_BLOCKS:
val /= (BLCKSZ / 1024);
break;
case GUC_UNIT_XBLOCKS:
val /= (XLOG_BLCKSZ / 1024);
break;
}
}
else if (strncmp(endptr, "MB", 2) == 0)
{
endptr += 2;
switch (flags & GUC_UNIT_MEMORY)
{
case GUC_UNIT_KB:
val *= KB_PER_MB;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_BLOCKS:
val *= KB_PER_MB / (BLCKSZ / 1024);
break;
case GUC_UNIT_XBLOCKS:
val *= KB_PER_MB / (XLOG_BLCKSZ / 1024);
break;
}
}
else if (strncmp(endptr, "GB", 2) == 0)
{
endptr += 2;
switch (flags & GUC_UNIT_MEMORY)
{
case GUC_UNIT_KB:
val *= KB_PER_GB;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_BLOCKS:
val *= KB_PER_GB / (BLCKSZ / 1024);
break;
case GUC_UNIT_XBLOCKS:
val *= KB_PER_GB / (XLOG_BLCKSZ / 1024);
break;
}
}
}
else if (flags & GUC_UNIT_TIME)
{
/* Set hint for use if no match or trailing garbage */
if (hintmsg)
*hintmsg = gettext_noop("Valid units for this parameter are \"ms\", \"s\", \"min\", \"h\", and \"d\".");
if (strncmp(endptr, "ms", 2) == 0)
{
endptr += 2;
switch (flags & GUC_UNIT_TIME)
{
case GUC_UNIT_S:
val /= MS_PER_S;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_MIN:
val /= MS_PER_MIN;
break;
}
}
else if (strncmp(endptr, "s", 1) == 0)
{
endptr += 1;
switch (flags & GUC_UNIT_TIME)
{
case GUC_UNIT_MS:
val *= MS_PER_S;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_MIN:
val /= S_PER_MIN;
break;
}
}
else if (strncmp(endptr, "min", 3) == 0)
{
endptr += 3;
switch (flags & GUC_UNIT_TIME)
{
case GUC_UNIT_MS:
val *= MS_PER_MIN;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_S:
val *= S_PER_MIN;
break;
}
}
else if (strncmp(endptr, "h", 1) == 0)
{
endptr += 1;
switch (flags & GUC_UNIT_TIME)
{
case GUC_UNIT_MS:
val *= MS_PER_H;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_S:
val *= S_PER_H;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_MIN:
val *= MIN_PER_H;
break;
}
}
else if (strncmp(endptr, "d", 1) == 0)
{
endptr += 1;
switch (flags & GUC_UNIT_TIME)
{
case GUC_UNIT_MS:
val *= MS_PER_D;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_S:
val *= S_PER_D;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_MIN:
val *= MIN_PER_D;
break;
}
}
}
/* allow whitespace after unit */
while (isspace((unsigned char) *endptr))
endptr++;
if (*endptr != '\0')
return false; /* appropriate hint, if any, already set */
/* Check for overflow due to units conversion */
if (val != (int64) ((int32) val))
{
if (hintmsg)
*hintmsg = gettext_noop("Value exceeds integer range.");
return false;
}
}
if (result)
*result = (int) val;
return true;
}
/*
* Try to parse value as a floating point number in the usual format.
* If the string parses okay, return true, else false.
* If okay and result is not NULL, return the value in *result.
*/
bool
parse_real(const char *value, double *result)
{
double val;
char *endptr;
if (result)
*result = 0; /* suppress compiler warning */
errno = 0;
val = strtod(value, &endptr);
if (endptr == value || errno == ERANGE)
return false;
/* allow whitespace after number */
while (isspace((unsigned char) *endptr))
endptr++;
if (*endptr != '\0')
return false;
if (result)
*result = val;
return true;
}
/*
* Lookup the name for an enum option with the selected value.
* Should only ever be called with known-valid values, so throws
* an elog(ERROR) if the enum option is not found.
*
* The returned string is a pointer to static data and not
* allocated for modification.
*/
const char *
config_enum_lookup_by_value(struct config_enum * record, int val)
{
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
const struct config_enum_entry *entry;
for (entry = record->options; entry && entry->name; entry++)
{
if (entry->val == val)
return entry->name;
}
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
elog(ERROR, "could not find enum option %d for %s",
val, record->gen.name);
return NULL; /* silence compiler */
}
/*
* Lookup the value for an enum option with the selected name
* (case-insensitive).
* If the enum option is found, sets the retval value and returns
* true. If it's not found, return FALSE and retval is set to 0.
*/
bool
config_enum_lookup_by_name(struct config_enum * record, const char *value,
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
int *retval)
{
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
const struct config_enum_entry *entry;
for (entry = record->options; entry && entry->name; entry++)
{
if (pg_strcasecmp(value, entry->name) == 0)
{
*retval = entry->val;
return TRUE;
}
}
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
*retval = 0;
return FALSE;
}
/*
* Return a list of all available options for an enum, excluding
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
* hidden ones, separated by the given separator.
* If prefix is non-NULL, it is added before the first enum value.
* If suffix is non-NULL, it is added to the end of the string.
*/
static char *
config_enum_get_options(struct config_enum * record, const char *prefix,
const char *suffix, const char *separator)
{
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
const struct config_enum_entry *entry;
StringInfoData retstr;
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
int seplen;
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
initStringInfo(&retstr);
appendStringInfoString(&retstr, prefix);
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
seplen = strlen(separator);
for (entry = record->options; entry && entry->name; entry++)
{
if (!entry->hidden)
{
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
appendStringInfoString(&retstr, entry->name);
appendBinaryStringInfo(&retstr, separator, seplen);
}
}
/*
* All the entries may have been hidden, leaving the string empty if no
* prefix was given. This indicates a broken GUC setup, since there is no
* use for an enum without any values, so we just check to make sure we
* don't write to invalid memory instead of actually trying to do
* something smart with it.
*/
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
if (retstr.len >= seplen)
{
/* Replace final separator */
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
retstr.data[retstr.len - seplen] = '\0';
retstr.len -= seplen;
}
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
appendStringInfoString(&retstr, suffix);
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
return retstr.data;
}
/*
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
* Sets option `name' to given value.
*
* The value should be a string, which will be parsed and converted to
* the appropriate data type. The context and source parameters indicate
* in which context this function is being called, so that it can apply the
* access restrictions properly.
*
* If value is NULL, set the option to its default value (normally the
* reset_val, but if source == PGC_S_DEFAULT we instead use the boot_val).
*
* action indicates whether to set the value globally in the session, locally
* to the current top transaction, or just for the duration of a function call.
*
* If changeVal is false then don't really set the option but do all
* the checks to see if it would work.
*
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
* Return value:
* +1: the value is valid and was successfully applied.
* 0: the name or value is invalid (but see below).
* -1: the value was not applied because of context, priority, or changeVal.
*
* If there is an error (non-existing option, invalid value) then an
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
* ereport(ERROR) is thrown *unless* this is called for a source for which
* we don't want an ERROR (currently, those are defaults, the config file,
* and per-database or per-user settings). In those cases we write a
* suitable error message via ereport() and return 0.
*
* See also SetConfigOption for an external interface.
*/
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
int
set_config_option(const char *name, const char *value,
GucContext context, GucSource source,
GucAction action, bool changeVal)
{
struct config_generic *record;
int elevel;
bool prohibitValueChange = false;
bool makeDefault;
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
if (source == PGC_S_DEFAULT || source == PGC_S_FILE)
{
/*
* To avoid cluttering the log, only the postmaster bleats loudly
* about problems with the config file.
*/
elevel = IsUnderPostmaster ? DEBUG3 : LOG;
}
else if (source == PGC_S_DATABASE || source == PGC_S_USER ||
source == PGC_S_DATABASE_USER)
elevel = WARNING;
else
elevel = ERROR;
record = find_option(name, true, elevel);
if (record == NULL)
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
errmsg("unrecognized configuration parameter \"%s\"", name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
/*
* Check if the option can be set at this time. See guc.h for the precise
* rules.
*/
switch (record->context)
{
case PGC_INTERNAL:
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
if (context != PGC_INTERNAL)
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
break;
case PGC_POSTMASTER:
if (context == PGC_SIGHUP)
{
/*
* We are re-reading a PGC_POSTMASTER variable from
* postgresql.conf. We can't change the setting, so we should
* give a warning if the DBA tries to change it. However,
* because of variant formats, canonicalization by check
* hooks, etc, we can't just compare the given string directly
* to what's stored. Set a flag to check below after we have
* the final storable value.
*/
prohibitValueChange = true;
}
else if (context != PGC_POSTMASTER)
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
2010-02-26 03:01:40 +01:00
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed without restarting the server",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
break;
case PGC_SIGHUP:
if (context != PGC_SIGHUP && context != PGC_POSTMASTER)
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed now",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* Hmm, the idea of the SIGHUP context is "ought to be global, but
* can be changed after postmaster start". But there's nothing
* that prevents a crafty administrator from sending SIGHUP
* signals to individual backends only.
*/
break;
case PGC_BACKEND:
if (context == PGC_SIGHUP)
{
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* If a PGC_BACKEND parameter is changed in the config file,
* we want to accept the new value in the postmaster (whence
* it will propagate to subsequently-started backends), but
* ignore it in existing backends. This is a tad klugy, but
* necessary because we don't re-read the config file during
* backend start.
*/
if (IsUnderPostmaster)
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return -1;
}
else if (context != PGC_POSTMASTER && context != PGC_BACKEND &&
source != PGC_S_CLIENT)
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be set after connection start",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
break;
case PGC_SUSET:
if (context == PGC_USERSET || context == PGC_BACKEND)
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
errmsg("permission denied to set parameter \"%s\"",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
break;
case PGC_USERSET:
/* always okay */
break;
}
/*
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
* Disallow changing GUC_NOT_WHILE_SEC_REST values if we are inside a
2010-02-26 03:01:40 +01:00
* security restriction context. We can reject this regardless of the GUC
* context or source, mainly because sources that it might be reasonable
* to override for won't be seen while inside a function.
*
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
* Note: variables marked GUC_NOT_WHILE_SEC_REST should usually be marked
* GUC_NO_RESET_ALL as well, because ResetAllOptions() doesn't check this.
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
* An exception might be made if the reset value is assumed to be "safe".
*
* Note: this flag is currently used for "session_authorization" and
2010-02-26 03:01:40 +01:00
* "role". We need to prohibit changing these inside a local userid
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
* context because when we exit it, GUC won't be notified, leaving things
* out of sync. (This could be fixed by forcing a new GUC nesting level,
2010-02-26 03:01:40 +01:00
* but that would change behavior in possibly-undesirable ways.) Also, we
* prohibit changing these in a security-restricted operation because
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
* otherwise RESET could be used to regain the session user's privileges.
*/
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
if (record->flags & GUC_NOT_WHILE_SEC_REST)
{
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
if (InLocalUserIdChange())
{
/*
2010-02-26 03:01:40 +01:00
* Phrasing of this error message is historical, but it's the most
* common case.
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
*/
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
errmsg("cannot set parameter \"%s\" within security-definer function",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
}
if (InSecurityRestrictedOperation())
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
errmsg("cannot set parameter \"%s\" within security-restricted operation",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
2009-12-09 22:57:51 +01:00
}
}
/*
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
* Should we set reset/stacked values? (If so, the behavior is not
* transactional.) This is done either when we get a default value from
* the database's/user's/client's default settings or when we reset a
* value to its default.
*/
makeDefault = changeVal && (source <= PGC_S_OVERRIDE) &&
((value != NULL) || source == PGC_S_DEFAULT);
/*
* Ignore attempted set if overridden by previously processed setting.
* However, if changeVal is false then plow ahead anyway since we are
* trying to find out if the value is potentially good, not actually use
* it. Also keep going if makeDefault is true, since we may want to set
* the reset/stacked values even if we can't set the variable itself.
*/
if (record->source > source)
{
2003-09-01 06:15:51 +02:00
if (changeVal && !makeDefault)
{
elog(DEBUG3, "\"%s\": setting ignored because previous source is higher priority",
name);
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return -1;
}
changeVal = false;
}
/*
* Evaluate value and set variable.
*/
switch (record->vartype)
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
{
case PGC_BOOL:
{
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
struct config_bool *conf = (struct config_bool *) record;
bool newval;
void *newextra = NULL;
if (value)
{
if (!parse_bool(value, &newval))
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
if (!call_bool_check_hook(conf, &newval, &newextra,
source, elevel))
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
else if (source == PGC_S_DEFAULT)
{
newval = conf->boot_val;
if (!call_bool_check_hook(conf, &newval, &newextra,
source, elevel))
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
else
{
newval = conf->reset_val;
newextra = conf->reset_extra;
source = conf->gen.reset_source;
context = conf->gen.reset_scontext;
}
if (prohibitValueChange)
{
if (*conf->variable != newval)
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed without restarting the server",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
return -1;
}
if (changeVal)
{
/* Save old value to support transaction abort */
if (!makeDefault)
push_old_value(&conf->gen, action);
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, newextra);
*conf->variable = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
newextra);
conf->gen.source = source;
conf->gen.scontext = context;
}
if (makeDefault)
{
GucStack *stack;
if (conf->gen.reset_source <= source)
{
conf->reset_val = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->reset_extra,
newextra);
conf->gen.reset_source = source;
conf->gen.reset_scontext = context;
}
for (stack = conf->gen.stack; stack; stack = stack->prev)
{
if (stack->source <= source)
{
stack->prior.val.boolval = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &stack->prior.extra,
newextra);
stack->source = source;
stack->scontext = context;
}
}
}
/* Perhaps we didn't install newextra anywhere */
if (newextra && !extra_field_used(&conf->gen, newextra))
free(newextra);
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
break;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
}
case PGC_INT:
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
{
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
struct config_int *conf = (struct config_int *) record;
int newval;
void *newextra = NULL;
if (value)
{
const char *hintmsg;
if (!parse_int(value, &newval, conf->gen.flags, &hintmsg))
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
errmsg("invalid value for parameter \"%s\": \"%s\"",
name, value),
hintmsg ? errhint("%s", _(hintmsg)) : 0));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
if (newval < conf->min || newval > conf->max)
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
errmsg("%d is outside the valid range for parameter \"%s\" (%d .. %d)",
newval, name, conf->min, conf->max)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
if (!call_int_check_hook(conf, &newval, &newextra,
source, elevel))
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
else if (source == PGC_S_DEFAULT)
{
newval = conf->boot_val;
if (!call_int_check_hook(conf, &newval, &newextra,
source, elevel))
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
else
{
newval = conf->reset_val;
newextra = conf->reset_extra;
source = conf->gen.reset_source;
context = conf->gen.reset_scontext;
}
if (prohibitValueChange)
{
if (*conf->variable != newval)
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed without restarting the server",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
return -1;
}
if (changeVal)
{
/* Save old value to support transaction abort */
if (!makeDefault)
push_old_value(&conf->gen, action);
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, newextra);
*conf->variable = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
newextra);
conf->gen.source = source;
conf->gen.scontext = context;
}
if (makeDefault)
{
GucStack *stack;
if (conf->gen.reset_source <= source)
{
conf->reset_val = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->reset_extra,
newextra);
conf->gen.reset_source = source;
conf->gen.reset_scontext = context;
}
for (stack = conf->gen.stack; stack; stack = stack->prev)
{
if (stack->source <= source)
{
stack->prior.val.intval = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &stack->prior.extra,
newextra);
stack->source = source;
stack->scontext = context;
}
}
}
/* Perhaps we didn't install newextra anywhere */
if (newextra && !extra_field_used(&conf->gen, newextra))
free(newextra);
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
break;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
}
case PGC_REAL:
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
{
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
struct config_real *conf = (struct config_real *) record;
double newval;
void *newextra = NULL;
if (value)
{
if (!parse_real(value, &newval))
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a numeric value",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
if (newval < conf->min || newval > conf->max)
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
errmsg("%g is outside the valid range for parameter \"%s\" (%g .. %g)",
newval, name, conf->min, conf->max)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
if (!call_real_check_hook(conf, &newval, &newextra,
source, elevel))
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
else if (source == PGC_S_DEFAULT)
{
newval = conf->boot_val;
if (!call_real_check_hook(conf, &newval, &newextra,
source, elevel))
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
else
{
newval = conf->reset_val;
newextra = conf->reset_extra;
source = conf->gen.reset_source;
context = conf->gen.reset_scontext;
}
if (prohibitValueChange)
{
if (*conf->variable != newval)
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed without restarting the server",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
return -1;
}
if (changeVal)
{
/* Save old value to support transaction abort */
if (!makeDefault)
push_old_value(&conf->gen, action);
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, newextra);
*conf->variable = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
newextra);
conf->gen.source = source;
conf->gen.scontext = context;
}
if (makeDefault)
{
GucStack *stack;
if (conf->gen.reset_source <= source)
{
conf->reset_val = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->reset_extra,
newextra);
conf->gen.reset_source = source;
conf->gen.reset_scontext = context;
}
for (stack = conf->gen.stack; stack; stack = stack->prev)
{
if (stack->source <= source)
{
stack->prior.val.realval = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &stack->prior.extra,
newextra);
stack->source = source;
stack->scontext = context;
}
}
}
/* Perhaps we didn't install newextra anywhere */
if (newextra && !extra_field_used(&conf->gen, newextra))
free(newextra);
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
break;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
}
case PGC_STRING:
{
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
struct config_string *conf = (struct config_string *) record;
char *newval;
void *newextra = NULL;
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
if (value)
{
/*
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
* The value passed by the caller could be transient, so
* we always strdup it.
*/
newval = guc_strdup(elevel, value);
if (newval == NULL)
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
/*
* The only built-in "parsing" check we have is to apply
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
* truncation if GUC_IS_NAME.
*/
if (conf->gen.flags & GUC_IS_NAME)
truncate_identifier(newval, strlen(newval), true);
if (!call_string_check_hook(conf, &newval, &newextra,
source, elevel))
{
free(newval);
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
}
else if (source == PGC_S_DEFAULT)
{
/* non-NULL boot_val must always get strdup'd */
if (conf->boot_val != NULL)
{
newval = guc_strdup(elevel, conf->boot_val);
if (newval == NULL)
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
else
newval = NULL;
if (!call_string_check_hook(conf, &newval, &newextra,
source, elevel))
{
free(newval);
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
}
else
{
/*
* strdup not needed, since reset_val is already under
* guc.c's control
*/
newval = conf->reset_val;
newextra = conf->reset_extra;
source = conf->gen.reset_source;
context = conf->gen.reset_scontext;
}
if (prohibitValueChange)
{
/* newval shouldn't be NULL, so we're a bit sloppy here */
if (*conf->variable == NULL || newval == NULL ||
strcmp(*conf->variable, newval) != 0)
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed without restarting the server",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
return -1;
}
if (changeVal)
{
/* Save old value to support transaction abort */
if (!makeDefault)
push_old_value(&conf->gen, action);
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, newextra);
set_string_field(conf, conf->variable, newval);
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
newextra);
conf->gen.source = source;
conf->gen.scontext = context;
}
if (makeDefault)
{
GucStack *stack;
if (conf->gen.reset_source <= source)
{
set_string_field(conf, &conf->reset_val, newval);
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->reset_extra,
newextra);
conf->gen.reset_source = source;
conf->gen.reset_scontext = context;
}
for (stack = conf->gen.stack; stack; stack = stack->prev)
{
if (stack->source <= source)
{
set_string_field(conf, &stack->prior.val.stringval,
newval);
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &stack->prior.extra,
newextra);
stack->source = source;
stack->scontext = context;
}
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
}
}
/* Perhaps we didn't install newval anywhere */
if (newval && !string_field_used(conf, newval))
free(newval);
/* Perhaps we didn't install newextra anywhere */
if (newextra && !extra_field_used(&conf->gen, newextra))
free(newextra);
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
break;
}
case PGC_ENUM:
{
struct config_enum *conf = (struct config_enum *) record;
int newval;
void *newextra = NULL;
if (value)
{
if (!config_enum_lookup_by_name(conf, value, &newval))
{
char *hintmsg;
hintmsg = config_enum_get_options(conf,
"Available values: ",
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
".", ", ");
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
errmsg("invalid value for parameter \"%s\": \"%s\"",
name, value),
hintmsg ? errhint("%s", _(hintmsg)) : 0));
if (hintmsg)
pfree(hintmsg);
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
if (!call_enum_check_hook(conf, &newval, &newextra,
source, elevel))
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
else if (source == PGC_S_DEFAULT)
{
newval = conf->boot_val;
if (!call_enum_check_hook(conf, &newval, &newextra,
source, elevel))
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
else
{
newval = conf->reset_val;
newextra = conf->reset_extra;
source = conf->gen.reset_source;
context = conf->gen.reset_scontext;
}
if (prohibitValueChange)
{
if (*conf->variable != newval)
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed without restarting the server",
name)));
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return 0;
}
return -1;
}
if (changeVal)
{
/* Save old value to support transaction abort */
if (!makeDefault)
push_old_value(&conf->gen, action);
if (conf->assign_hook)
(*conf->assign_hook) (newval, newextra);
*conf->variable = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->gen.extra,
newextra);
conf->gen.source = source;
conf->gen.scontext = context;
}
if (makeDefault)
{
GucStack *stack;
if (conf->gen.reset_source <= source)
{
conf->reset_val = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &conf->reset_extra,
newextra);
conf->gen.reset_source = source;
conf->gen.reset_scontext = context;
}
for (stack = conf->gen.stack; stack; stack = stack->prev)
{
if (stack->source <= source)
{
stack->prior.val.enumval = newval;
set_extra_field(&conf->gen, &stack->prior.extra,
newextra);
stack->source = source;
stack->scontext = context;
}
}
}
/* Perhaps we didn't install newextra anywhere */
if (newextra && !extra_field_used(&conf->gen, newextra))
free(newextra);
break;
}
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
}
2003-09-01 06:15:51 +02:00
if (changeVal && (record->flags & GUC_REPORT))
ReportGUCOption(record);
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
return changeVal ? 1 : -1;
}
/*
* Set the fields for source file and line number the setting came from.
*/
static void
set_config_sourcefile(const char *name, char *sourcefile, int sourceline)
{
struct config_generic *record;
int elevel;
/*
* To avoid cluttering the log, only the postmaster bleats loudly about
* problems with the config file.
*/
elevel = IsUnderPostmaster ? DEBUG3 : LOG;
record = find_option(name, true, elevel);
/* should not happen */
if (record == NULL)
elog(ERROR, "unrecognized configuration parameter \"%s\"", name);
sourcefile = guc_strdup(elevel, sourcefile);
if (record->sourcefile)
free(record->sourcefile);
record->sourcefile = sourcefile;
record->sourceline = sourceline;
}
/*
* Set a config option to the given value. See also set_config_option,
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
* this is just the wrapper to be called from outside GUC. NB: this
* is used only for non-transactional operations.
*
* Note: there is no support here for setting source file/line, as it
* is currently not needed.
*/
void
SetConfigOption(const char *name, const char *value,
GucContext context, GucSource source)
{
(void) set_config_option(name, value, context, source,
GUC_ACTION_SET, true);
}
/*
* Fetch the current value of the option `name', as a string.
*
* If the option doesn't exist, return NULL if missing_ok is true (NOTE that
* this cannot be distinguished from a string variable with a NULL value!),
* otherwise throw an ereport and don't return.
*
* If restrict_superuser is true, we also enforce that only superusers can
* see GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY variables. This should only be passed as true
* in user-driven calls.
*
* The string is *not* allocated for modification and is really only
* valid until the next call to configuration related functions.
*/
const char *
GetConfigOption(const char *name, bool missing_ok, bool restrict_superuser)
{
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
struct config_generic *record;
static char buffer[256];
record = find_option(name, false, ERROR);
if (record == NULL)
{
if (missing_ok)
return NULL;
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
errmsg("unrecognized configuration parameter \"%s\"",
name)));
}
if (restrict_superuser &&
(record->flags & GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY) &&
!superuser())
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
errmsg("must be superuser to examine \"%s\"", name)));
switch (record->vartype)
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
{
case PGC_BOOL:
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
return *((struct config_bool *) record)->variable ? "on" : "off";
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
case PGC_INT:
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%d",
*((struct config_int *) record)->variable);
return buffer;
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
case PGC_REAL:
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%g",
*((struct config_real *) record)->variable);
return buffer;
case PGC_STRING:
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
return *((struct config_string *) record)->variable;
case PGC_ENUM:
return config_enum_lookup_by_value((struct config_enum *) record,
*((struct config_enum *) record)->variable);
2001-01-24 19:37:31 +01:00
}
return NULL;
}
/*
* Get the RESET value associated with the given option.
*
* Note: this is not re-entrant, due to use of static result buffer;
* not to mention that a string variable could have its reset_val changed.
* Beware of assuming the result value is good for very long.
*/
const char *
GetConfigOptionResetString(const char *name)
{
struct config_generic *record;
static char buffer[256];
record = find_option(name, false, ERROR);
if (record == NULL)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
errmsg("unrecognized configuration parameter \"%s\"", name)));
if ((record->flags & GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY) && !superuser())
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
errmsg("must be superuser to examine \"%s\"", name)));
switch (record->vartype)
{
case PGC_BOOL:
return ((struct config_bool *) record)->reset_val ? "on" : "off";
case PGC_INT:
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%d",
((struct config_int *) record)->reset_val);
return buffer;
case PGC_REAL:
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%g",
((struct config_real *) record)->reset_val);
return buffer;
case PGC_STRING:
return ((struct config_string *) record)->reset_val;
case PGC_ENUM:
return config_enum_lookup_by_value((struct config_enum *) record,
((struct config_enum *) record)->reset_val);
}
return NULL;
}
/*
* flatten_set_variable_args
* Given a parsenode List as emitted by the grammar for SET,
* convert to the flat string representation used by GUC.
*
* We need to be told the name of the variable the args are for, because
* the flattening rules vary (ugh).
*
* The result is NULL if args is NIL (ie, SET ... TO DEFAULT), otherwise
* a palloc'd string.
*/
static char *
flatten_set_variable_args(const char *name, List *args)
{
struct config_generic *record;
int flags;
StringInfoData buf;
ListCell *l;
/* Fast path if just DEFAULT */
if (args == NIL)
return NULL;
/*
* Get flags for the variable; if it's not known, use default flags.
* (Caller might throw error later, but not our business to do so here.)
*/
record = find_option(name, false, WARNING);
if (record)
flags = record->flags;
else
flags = 0;
/* Complain if list input and non-list variable */
if ((flags & GUC_LIST_INPUT) == 0 &&
list_length(args) != 1)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
errmsg("SET %s takes only one argument", name)));
initStringInfo(&buf);
/*
* Each list member may be a plain A_Const node, or an A_Const within a
* TypeCast; the latter case is supported only for ConstInterval arguments
* (for SET TIME ZONE).
*/
foreach(l, args)
{
Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(l);
char *val;
TypeName *typeName = NULL;
A_Const *con;
if (l != list_head(args))
appendStringInfo(&buf, ", ");
if (IsA(arg, TypeCast))
{
TypeCast *tc = (TypeCast *) arg;
arg = tc->arg;
typeName = tc->typeName;
}
if (!IsA(arg, A_Const))
elog(ERROR, "unrecognized node type: %d", (int) nodeTag(arg));
con = (A_Const *) arg;
switch (nodeTag(&con->val))
{
case T_Integer:
appendStringInfo(&buf, "%ld", intVal(&con->val));
break;
case T_Float:
/* represented as a string, so just copy it */
appendStringInfoString(&buf, strVal(&con->val));
break;
case T_String:
val = strVal(&con->val);
if (typeName != NULL)
{
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* Must be a ConstInterval argument for TIME ZONE. Coerce
* to interval and back to normalize the value and account
* for any typmod.
*/
Oid typoid;
int32 typmod;
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
Datum interval;
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
char *intervalout;
typenameTypeIdAndMod(NULL, typeName, &typoid, &typmod);
Assert(typoid == INTERVALOID);
interval =
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
DirectFunctionCall3(interval_in,
CStringGetDatum(val),
ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid),
Int32GetDatum(typmod));
intervalout =
DatumGetCString(DirectFunctionCall1(interval_out,
interval));
appendStringInfo(&buf, "INTERVAL '%s'", intervalout);
}
else
{
/*
* Plain string literal or identifier. For quote mode,
* quote it if it's not a vanilla identifier.
*/
if (flags & GUC_LIST_QUOTE)
appendStringInfoString(&buf, quote_identifier(val));
else
appendStringInfoString(&buf, val);
}
break;
default:
elog(ERROR, "unrecognized node type: %d",
(int) nodeTag(&con->val));
break;
}
}
return buf.data;
}
/*
* SET command
*/
void
ExecSetVariableStmt(VariableSetStmt *stmt)
{
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
GucAction action = stmt->is_local ? GUC_ACTION_LOCAL : GUC_ACTION_SET;
switch (stmt->kind)
{
case VAR_SET_VALUE:
case VAR_SET_CURRENT:
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
(void) set_config_option(stmt->name,
ExtractSetVariableArgs(stmt),
(superuser() ? PGC_SUSET : PGC_USERSET),
PGC_S_SESSION,
action,
true);
break;
case VAR_SET_MULTI:
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
/*
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
* Special case for special SQL syntax that effectively sets more
* than one variable per statement.
*/
if (strcmp(stmt->name, "TRANSACTION") == 0)
{
ListCell *head;
foreach(head, stmt->args)
{
DefElem *item = (DefElem *) lfirst(head);
if (strcmp(item->defname, "transaction_isolation") == 0)
SetPGVariable("transaction_isolation",
list_make1(item->arg), stmt->is_local);
else if (strcmp(item->defname, "transaction_read_only") == 0)
SetPGVariable("transaction_read_only",
list_make1(item->arg), stmt->is_local);
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
else if (strcmp(item->defname, "transaction_deferrable") == 0)
SetPGVariable("transaction_deferrable",
list_make1(item->arg), stmt->is_local);
else
elog(ERROR, "unexpected SET TRANSACTION element: %s",
item->defname);
}
}
else if (strcmp(stmt->name, "SESSION CHARACTERISTICS") == 0)
{
ListCell *head;
foreach(head, stmt->args)
{
DefElem *item = (DefElem *) lfirst(head);
if (strcmp(item->defname, "transaction_isolation") == 0)
SetPGVariable("default_transaction_isolation",
list_make1(item->arg), stmt->is_local);
else if (strcmp(item->defname, "transaction_read_only") == 0)
SetPGVariable("default_transaction_read_only",
list_make1(item->arg), stmt->is_local);
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
else if (strcmp(item->defname, "transaction_deferrable") == 0)
SetPGVariable("default_transaction_deferrable",
list_make1(item->arg), stmt->is_local);
else
elog(ERROR, "unexpected SET SESSION element: %s",
item->defname);
}
}
else
elog(ERROR, "unexpected SET MULTI element: %s",
stmt->name);
break;
case VAR_SET_DEFAULT:
case VAR_RESET:
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
(void) set_config_option(stmt->name,
NULL,
(superuser() ? PGC_SUSET : PGC_USERSET),
PGC_S_SESSION,
action,
true);
break;
case VAR_RESET_ALL:
ResetAllOptions();
break;
}
}
/*
* Get the value to assign for a VariableSetStmt, or NULL if it's RESET.
* The result is palloc'd.
*
* This is exported for use by actions such as ALTER ROLE SET.
*/
char *
ExtractSetVariableArgs(VariableSetStmt *stmt)
{
switch (stmt->kind)
{
case VAR_SET_VALUE:
return flatten_set_variable_args(stmt->name, stmt->args);
case VAR_SET_CURRENT:
return GetConfigOptionByName(stmt->name, NULL);
default:
return NULL;
}
}
/*
* SetPGVariable - SET command exported as an easily-C-callable function.
*
* This provides access to SET TO value, as well as SET TO DEFAULT (expressed
* by passing args == NIL), but not SET FROM CURRENT functionality.
*/
void
SetPGVariable(const char *name, List *args, bool is_local)
{
char *argstring = flatten_set_variable_args(name, args);
/* Note SET DEFAULT (argstring == NULL) is equivalent to RESET */
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
(void) set_config_option(name,
argstring,
(superuser() ? PGC_SUSET : PGC_USERSET),
PGC_S_SESSION,
is_local ? GUC_ACTION_LOCAL : GUC_ACTION_SET,
true);
}
/*
* SET command wrapped as a SQL callable function.
*/
Datum
set_config_by_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
char *name;
char *value;
char *new_value;
bool is_local;
if (PG_ARGISNULL(0))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_NULL_VALUE_NOT_ALLOWED),
errmsg("SET requires parameter name")));
/* Get the GUC variable name */
name = TextDatumGetCString(PG_GETARG_DATUM(0));
/* Get the desired value or set to NULL for a reset request */
if (PG_ARGISNULL(1))
value = NULL;
else
value = TextDatumGetCString(PG_GETARG_DATUM(1));
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* Get the desired state of is_local. Default to false if provided value
* is NULL
*/
if (PG_ARGISNULL(2))
is_local = false;
else
is_local = PG_GETARG_BOOL(2);
/* Note SET DEFAULT (argstring == NULL) is equivalent to RESET */
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
(void) set_config_option(name,
value,
(superuser() ? PGC_SUSET : PGC_USERSET),
PGC_S_SESSION,
is_local ? GUC_ACTION_LOCAL : GUC_ACTION_SET,
true);
/* get the new current value */
new_value = GetConfigOptionByName(name, NULL);
/* Convert return string to text */
PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(cstring_to_text(new_value));
}
/*
* Common code for DefineCustomXXXVariable subroutines: allocate the
* new variable's config struct and fill in generic fields.
*/
static struct config_generic *
init_custom_variable(const char *name,
const char *short_desc,
const char *long_desc,
GucContext context,
int flags,
enum config_type type,
size_t sz)
{
struct config_generic *gen;
/*
* Only allow custom PGC_POSTMASTER variables to be created during shared
* library preload; any later than that, we can't ensure that the value
* doesn't change after startup. This is a fatal elog if it happens; just
* erroring out isn't safe because we don't know what the calling loadable
* module might already have hooked into.
*/
if (context == PGC_POSTMASTER &&
!process_shared_preload_libraries_in_progress)
elog(FATAL, "cannot create PGC_POSTMASTER variables after startup");
gen = (struct config_generic *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sz);
memset(gen, 0, sz);
gen->name = guc_strdup(ERROR, name);
gen->context = context;
gen->group = CUSTOM_OPTIONS;
gen->short_desc = short_desc;
gen->long_desc = long_desc;
gen->flags = flags;
gen->vartype = type;
return gen;
}
/*
* Common code for DefineCustomXXXVariable subroutines: insert the new
* variable into the GUC variable array, replacing any placeholder.
*/
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
static void
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
define_custom_variable(struct config_generic * variable)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
const char *name = variable->name;
const char **nameAddr = &name;
const char *value;
struct config_string *pHolder;
struct config_generic **res;
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/*
* See if there's a placeholder by the same name.
*/
res = (struct config_generic **) bsearch((void *) &nameAddr,
(void *) guc_variables,
num_guc_variables,
sizeof(struct config_generic *),
guc_var_compare);
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
if (res == NULL)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
/*
* No placeholder to replace, so we can just add it ... but first,
* make sure it's initialized to its default value.
*/
InitializeOneGUCOption(variable);
add_guc_variable(variable, ERROR);
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
return;
}
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/*
* This better be a placeholder
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
*/
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
if (((*res)->flags & GUC_CUSTOM_PLACEHOLDER) == 0)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INTERNAL_ERROR),
errmsg("attempt to redefine parameter \"%s\"", name)));
Assert((*res)->vartype == PGC_STRING);
pHolder = (struct config_string *) (*res);
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/*
* First, set the variable to its default value. We must do this even
* though we intend to immediately apply a new value, since it's possible
* that the new value is invalid.
*/
InitializeOneGUCOption(variable);
/*
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
* Replace the placeholder. We aren't changing the name, so no re-sorting
* is necessary
*/
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
*res = variable;
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* Assign the string value stored in the placeholder to the real variable.
*
* XXX this is not really good enough --- it should be a nontransactional
* assignment, since we don't want it to roll back if the current xact
* fails later. (Or do we?)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
*/
value = *pHolder->variable;
if (value)
{
if (set_config_option(name, value,
pHolder->gen.scontext, pHolder->gen.source,
GUC_ACTION_SET, true) != 0)
{
/* Also copy over any saved source-location information */
if (pHolder->gen.sourcefile)
set_config_sourcefile(name, pHolder->gen.sourcefile,
pHolder->gen.sourceline);
}
}
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
/*
* Free up as much as we conveniently can of the placeholder structure
* (this neglects any stack items...)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
*/
set_string_field(pHolder, pHolder->variable, NULL);
set_string_field(pHolder, &pHolder->reset_val, NULL);
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
free(pHolder);
}
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
void
DefineCustomBoolVariable(const char *name,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
const char *short_desc,
const char *long_desc,
bool *valueAddr,
bool bootValue,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
GucContext context,
int flags,
GucBoolCheckHook check_hook,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook,
GucShowHook show_hook)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
struct config_bool *var;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
var = (struct config_bool *)
init_custom_variable(name, short_desc, long_desc, context, flags,
PGC_BOOL, sizeof(struct config_bool));
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
var->variable = valueAddr;
var->boot_val = bootValue;
var->reset_val = bootValue;
var->check_hook = check_hook;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
var->assign_hook = assign_hook;
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
var->show_hook = show_hook;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
define_custom_variable(&var->gen);
}
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
void
DefineCustomIntVariable(const char *name,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
const char *short_desc,
const char *long_desc,
int *valueAddr,
int bootValue,
int minValue,
int maxValue,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
GucContext context,
int flags,
GucIntCheckHook check_hook,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
GucIntAssignHook assign_hook,
GucShowHook show_hook)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
struct config_int *var;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
var = (struct config_int *)
init_custom_variable(name, short_desc, long_desc, context, flags,
PGC_INT, sizeof(struct config_int));
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
var->variable = valueAddr;
var->boot_val = bootValue;
var->reset_val = bootValue;
var->min = minValue;
var->max = maxValue;
var->check_hook = check_hook;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
var->assign_hook = assign_hook;
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
var->show_hook = show_hook;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
define_custom_variable(&var->gen);
}
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
void
DefineCustomRealVariable(const char *name,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
const char *short_desc,
const char *long_desc,
double *valueAddr,
double bootValue,
double minValue,
double maxValue,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
GucContext context,
int flags,
GucRealCheckHook check_hook,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
GucRealAssignHook assign_hook,
GucShowHook show_hook)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
struct config_real *var;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
var = (struct config_real *)
init_custom_variable(name, short_desc, long_desc, context, flags,
PGC_REAL, sizeof(struct config_real));
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
var->variable = valueAddr;
var->boot_val = bootValue;
var->reset_val = bootValue;
var->min = minValue;
var->max = maxValue;
var->check_hook = check_hook;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
var->assign_hook = assign_hook;
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
var->show_hook = show_hook;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
define_custom_variable(&var->gen);
}
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
void
DefineCustomStringVariable(const char *name,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
const char *short_desc,
const char *long_desc,
char **valueAddr,
const char *bootValue,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
GucContext context,
int flags,
GucStringCheckHook check_hook,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
GucStringAssignHook assign_hook,
GucShowHook show_hook)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
struct config_string *var;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
var = (struct config_string *)
init_custom_variable(name, short_desc, long_desc, context, flags,
PGC_STRING, sizeof(struct config_string));
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
var->variable = valueAddr;
var->boot_val = bootValue;
var->check_hook = check_hook;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
var->assign_hook = assign_hook;
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
var->show_hook = show_hook;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
define_custom_variable(&var->gen);
}
void
DefineCustomEnumVariable(const char *name,
const char *short_desc,
const char *long_desc,
int *valueAddr,
int bootValue,
const struct config_enum_entry * options,
GucContext context,
int flags,
GucEnumCheckHook check_hook,
GucEnumAssignHook assign_hook,
GucShowHook show_hook)
{
struct config_enum *var;
var = (struct config_enum *)
init_custom_variable(name, short_desc, long_desc, context, flags,
PGC_ENUM, sizeof(struct config_enum));
var->variable = valueAddr;
var->boot_val = bootValue;
var->reset_val = bootValue;
var->options = options;
var->check_hook = check_hook;
var->assign_hook = assign_hook;
var->show_hook = show_hook;
define_custom_variable(&var->gen);
}
void
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
EmitWarningsOnPlaceholders(const char *className)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
int classLen = strlen(className);
int i;
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
for (i = 0; i < num_guc_variables; i++)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
struct config_generic *var = guc_variables[i];
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
if ((var->flags & GUC_CUSTOM_PLACEHOLDER) != 0 &&
strncmp(className, var->name, classLen) == 0 &&
var->name[classLen] == GUC_QUALIFIER_SEPARATOR)
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
{
ereport(WARNING,
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
errmsg("unrecognized configuration parameter \"%s\"",
var->name)));
The patch adresses the TODO list item "Allow external interfaces to extend the GUC variable set". Plugin modules like the pl<lang> modules needs a way to declare configuration parameters. The postmaster has no knowledge of such modules when it reads the postgresql.conf file. Rather than allowing totally unknown configuration parameters, the concept of a variable "class" is introduced. Variables that belongs to a declared classes will create a placeholder value of string type and will not generate an error. When a module is loaded, it will declare variables for such a class and make those variables "consume" any placeholders that has been defined. Finally, the module will generate warnings for unrecognized placeholders defined for its class. More detail: The design is outlined after the suggestions made by Tom Lane and Joe Conway in this thread: http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2004-02/msg00229.php A new string variable 'custom_variable_classes' is introduced. This variable is a comma separated string of identifiers. Each identifier denots a 'class' that will allow its members to be added without error. This variable must be defined in postmaster.conf. The lexer (guc_file.l) is changed so that it can accept a qualified name in the form <ID>.<ID> as the name of a variable. I also changed so that the 'custom_variable_classes', if found, is added first of all variables in order to remove the order of declaration issue. The guc_variables table is made more dynamic. It is originally created with 20% slack and can grow dynamically. A capacity is introduced to avoid resizing every time a new variable is added. guc_variables and num_guc_variables becomes static (hidden). The GucInfoMain now uses the new function get_guc_variables() and GetNumConfigOptions instead or using the guc_variables directly. The find_option() function, when passed a missing name, will check if the name is qualified. If the name is qualified and if the qualifier denotes a class included in the 'custom_variable_classes', a placeholder variable will be created. Such a placeholder will not participate in a list operation but will otherwise function as a normal string variable. Define<type>GucVariable() functions will be added, one for each variable type. They are inteded to be used by add-on modules like the pl<lang> mappings. Example: extern void DefineCustomBoolVariable( const char* name, const char* short_desc, const char* long_desc, bool* valueAddr, GucContext context, GucBoolAssignHook assign_hook, GucShowHook show_hook); (I created typedefs for the assign-hook and show-hook functions). A call to these functions will define a new GUC-variable. If a placeholder exists it will be replaced but it's value will be used in place of the default value. The valueAddr is assumed ot point at a default value when the define function is called. The only constraint that is imposed on a Custom variable is that its name is qualified. Finally, a function: void EmittWarningsOnPlacholders(const char* className) was added. This function should be called when a module has completed its variable definitions. At that time, no placeholders should remain for the class that the module uses. If they do, elog(INFO, ...) messages will be issued to inform the user that unrecognized variables are present. Thomas Hallgren
2004-05-26 17:07:41 +02:00
}
}
}
/*
* SHOW command
*/
void
GetPGVariable(const char *name, DestReceiver *dest)
{
if (guc_name_compare(name, "all") == 0)
ShowAllGUCConfig(dest);
else
ShowGUCConfigOption(name, dest);
}
TupleDesc
GetPGVariableResultDesc(const char *name)
{
TupleDesc tupdesc;
if (guc_name_compare(name, "all") == 0)
{
/* need a tuple descriptor representing three TEXT columns */
tupdesc = CreateTemplateTupleDesc(3, false);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 1, "name",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 2, "setting",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 3, "description",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
}
else
{
const char *varname;
/* Get the canonical spelling of name */
(void) GetConfigOptionByName(name, &varname);
/* need a tuple descriptor representing a single TEXT column */
tupdesc = CreateTemplateTupleDesc(1, false);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 1, varname,
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
}
return tupdesc;
}
/*
* SHOW command
*/
static void
ShowGUCConfigOption(const char *name, DestReceiver *dest)
{
TupOutputState *tstate;
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
TupleDesc tupdesc;
const char *varname;
char *value;
/* Get the value and canonical spelling of name */
value = GetConfigOptionByName(name, &varname);
/* need a tuple descriptor representing a single TEXT column */
tupdesc = CreateTemplateTupleDesc(1, false);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 1, varname,
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
/* prepare for projection of tuples */
tstate = begin_tup_output_tupdesc(dest, tupdesc);
/* Send it */
do_text_output_oneline(tstate, value);
end_tup_output(tstate);
}
/*
* SHOW ALL command
*/
static void
ShowAllGUCConfig(DestReceiver *dest)
{
bool am_superuser = superuser();
int i;
TupOutputState *tstate;
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
TupleDesc tupdesc;
2010-02-26 03:01:40 +01:00
Datum values[3];
bool isnull[3] = {false, false, false};
/* need a tuple descriptor representing three TEXT columns */
tupdesc = CreateTemplateTupleDesc(3, false);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 1, "name",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 2, "setting",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 3, "description",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
/* prepare for projection of tuples */
tstate = begin_tup_output_tupdesc(dest, tupdesc);
for (i = 0; i < num_guc_variables; i++)
{
struct config_generic *conf = guc_variables[i];
2010-02-26 03:01:40 +01:00
char *setting;
if ((conf->flags & GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL) ||
((conf->flags & GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY) && !am_superuser))
continue;
/* assign to the values array */
values[0] = PointerGetDatum(cstring_to_text(conf->name));
setting = _ShowOption(conf, true);
if (setting)
{
values[1] = PointerGetDatum(cstring_to_text(setting));
isnull[1] = false;
}
else
{
values[1] = PointerGetDatum(NULL);
isnull[1] = true;
}
values[2] = PointerGetDatum(cstring_to_text(conf->short_desc));
/* send it to dest */
do_tup_output(tstate, values, isnull);
/* clean up */
pfree(DatumGetPointer(values[0]));
if (setting)
{
pfree(setting);
pfree(DatumGetPointer(values[1]));
}
pfree(DatumGetPointer(values[2]));
}
end_tup_output(tstate);
}
/*
* Return GUC variable value by name; optionally return canonical
* form of name. Return value is palloc'd.
*/
char *
GetConfigOptionByName(const char *name, const char **varname)
{
struct config_generic *record;
record = find_option(name, false, ERROR);
if (record == NULL)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
errmsg("unrecognized configuration parameter \"%s\"", name)));
if ((record->flags & GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY) && !superuser())
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
errmsg("must be superuser to examine \"%s\"", name)));
if (varname)
*varname = record->name;
return _ShowOption(record, true);
}
/*
* Return GUC variable value by variable number; optionally return canonical
* form of name. Return value is palloc'd.
*/
void
GetConfigOptionByNum(int varnum, const char **values, bool *noshow)
{
2003-08-04 02:43:34 +02:00
char buffer[256];
struct config_generic *conf;
/* check requested variable number valid */
Assert((varnum >= 0) && (varnum < num_guc_variables));
conf = guc_variables[varnum];
if (noshow)
{
if ((conf->flags & GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL) ||
((conf->flags & GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY) && !superuser()))
*noshow = true;
else
*noshow = false;
}
/* first get the generic attributes */
/* name */
values[0] = conf->name;
/* setting : use _ShowOption in order to avoid duplicating the logic */
values[1] = _ShowOption(conf, false);
/* unit */
if (conf->vartype == PGC_INT)
{
static char buf[8];
switch (conf->flags & (GUC_UNIT_MEMORY | GUC_UNIT_TIME))
{
case GUC_UNIT_KB:
values[2] = "kB";
break;
case GUC_UNIT_BLOCKS:
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%dkB", BLCKSZ / 1024);
values[2] = buf;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_XBLOCKS:
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%dkB", XLOG_BLCKSZ / 1024);
values[2] = buf;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_MS:
values[2] = "ms";
break;
case GUC_UNIT_S:
values[2] = "s";
break;
case GUC_UNIT_MIN:
values[2] = "min";
break;
default:
values[2] = "";
break;
}
}
else
values[2] = NULL;
/* group */
values[3] = config_group_names[conf->group];
/* short_desc */
values[4] = conf->short_desc;
/* extra_desc */
values[5] = conf->long_desc;
/* context */
values[6] = GucContext_Names[conf->context];
/* vartype */
values[7] = config_type_names[conf->vartype];
/* source */
values[8] = GucSource_Names[conf->source];
/* now get the type specifc attributes */
switch (conf->vartype)
{
case PGC_BOOL:
{
struct config_bool *lconf = (struct config_bool *) conf;
/* min_val */
values[9] = NULL;
/* max_val */
values[10] = NULL;
/* enumvals */
values[11] = NULL;
/* boot_val */
values[12] = pstrdup(lconf->boot_val ? "on" : "off");
/* reset_val */
values[13] = pstrdup(lconf->reset_val ? "on" : "off");
}
break;
case PGC_INT:
{
struct config_int *lconf = (struct config_int *) conf;
/* min_val */
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%d", lconf->min);
values[9] = pstrdup(buffer);
/* max_val */
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%d", lconf->max);
values[10] = pstrdup(buffer);
/* enumvals */
values[11] = NULL;
/* boot_val */
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%d", lconf->boot_val);
values[12] = pstrdup(buffer);
/* reset_val */
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%d", lconf->reset_val);
values[13] = pstrdup(buffer);
}
break;
case PGC_REAL:
{
struct config_real *lconf = (struct config_real *) conf;
/* min_val */
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%g", lconf->min);
values[9] = pstrdup(buffer);
/* max_val */
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%g", lconf->max);
values[10] = pstrdup(buffer);
/* enumvals */
values[11] = NULL;
/* boot_val */
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%g", lconf->boot_val);
values[12] = pstrdup(buffer);
/* reset_val */
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%g", lconf->reset_val);
values[13] = pstrdup(buffer);
}
break;
case PGC_STRING:
{
struct config_string *lconf = (struct config_string *) conf;
/* min_val */
values[9] = NULL;
/* max_val */
values[10] = NULL;
/* enumvals */
values[11] = NULL;
/* boot_val */
if (lconf->boot_val == NULL)
values[12] = NULL;
else
values[12] = pstrdup(lconf->boot_val);
/* reset_val */
if (lconf->reset_val == NULL)
values[13] = NULL;
else
values[13] = pstrdup(lconf->reset_val);
}
break;
case PGC_ENUM:
{
struct config_enum *lconf = (struct config_enum *) conf;
/* min_val */
values[9] = NULL;
/* max_val */
values[10] = NULL;
/* enumvals */
/*
* NOTE! enumvals with double quotes in them are not
* supported!
*/
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
values[11] = config_enum_get_options((struct config_enum *) conf,
"{\"", "\"}", "\",\"");
/* boot_val */
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
values[12] = pstrdup(config_enum_lookup_by_value(lconf,
lconf->boot_val));
/* reset_val */
2008-12-02 03:00:32 +01:00
values[13] = pstrdup(config_enum_lookup_by_value(lconf,
lconf->reset_val));
}
break;
default:
{
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* should never get here, but in case we do, set 'em to NULL
*/
/* min_val */
values[9] = NULL;
/* max_val */
values[10] = NULL;
/* enumvals */
values[11] = NULL;
/* boot_val */
values[12] = NULL;
/* reset_val */
values[13] = NULL;
}
break;
}
/*
* If the setting came from a config file, set the source location. For
* security reasons, we don't show source file/line number for
* non-superusers.
*/
if (conf->source == PGC_S_FILE && superuser())
{
values[14] = conf->sourcefile;
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%d", conf->sourceline);
values[15] = pstrdup(buffer);
}
else
{
values[14] = NULL;
values[15] = NULL;
}
}
/*
* Return the total number of GUC variables
*/
int
GetNumConfigOptions(void)
{
return num_guc_variables;
}
/*
* show_config_by_name - equiv to SHOW X command but implemented as
* a function.
*/
Datum
show_config_by_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
char *varname;
char *varval;
/* Get the GUC variable name */
varname = TextDatumGetCString(PG_GETARG_DATUM(0));
/* Get the value */
varval = GetConfigOptionByName(varname, NULL);
/* Convert to text */
PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(cstring_to_text(varval));
}
/*
* show_all_settings - equiv to SHOW ALL command but implemented as
* a Table Function.
*/
#define NUM_PG_SETTINGS_ATTS 16
Datum
show_all_settings(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
FuncCallContext *funcctx;
TupleDesc tupdesc;
int call_cntr;
int max_calls;
AttInMetadata *attinmeta;
MemoryContext oldcontext;
/* stuff done only on the first call of the function */
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
if (SRF_IS_FIRSTCALL())
{
/* create a function context for cross-call persistence */
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
funcctx = SRF_FIRSTCALL_INIT();
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* switch to memory context appropriate for multiple function calls
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
*/
oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(funcctx->multi_call_memory_ctx);
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* need a tuple descriptor representing NUM_PG_SETTINGS_ATTS columns
* of the appropriate types
*/
tupdesc = CreateTemplateTupleDesc(NUM_PG_SETTINGS_ATTS, false);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 1, "name",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 2, "setting",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 3, "unit",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 4, "category",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 5, "short_desc",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 6, "extra_desc",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 7, "context",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 8, "vartype",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 9, "source",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 10, "min_val",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 11, "max_val",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 12, "enumvals",
TEXTARRAYOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 13, "boot_val",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 14, "reset_val",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 15, "sourcefile",
TEXTOID, -1, 0);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 16, "sourceline",
INT4OID, -1, 0);
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* Generate attribute metadata needed later to produce tuples from raw
* C strings
*/
attinmeta = TupleDescGetAttInMetadata(tupdesc);
funcctx->attinmeta = attinmeta;
/* total number of tuples to be returned */
funcctx->max_calls = GetNumConfigOptions();
MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext);
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
}
/* stuff done on every call of the function */
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
funcctx = SRF_PERCALL_SETUP();
call_cntr = funcctx->call_cntr;
max_calls = funcctx->max_calls;
attinmeta = funcctx->attinmeta;
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
if (call_cntr < max_calls) /* do when there is more left to send */
{
char *values[NUM_PG_SETTINGS_ATTS];
bool noshow;
HeapTuple tuple;
Datum result;
/*
* Get the next visible GUC variable name and value
*/
do
{
GetConfigOptionByNum(call_cntr, (const char **) values, &noshow);
if (noshow)
{
/* bump the counter and get the next config setting */
call_cntr = ++funcctx->call_cntr;
/* make sure we haven't gone too far now */
if (call_cntr >= max_calls)
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
SRF_RETURN_DONE(funcctx);
}
} while (noshow);
/* build a tuple */
tuple = BuildTupleFromCStrings(attinmeta, values);
/* make the tuple into a datum */
result = HeapTupleGetDatum(tuple);
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
SRF_RETURN_NEXT(funcctx, result);
}
else
{
/* do when there is no more left */
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
SRF_RETURN_DONE(funcctx);
}
}
static char *
_ShowOption(struct config_generic * record, bool use_units)
{
char buffer[256];
const char *val;
switch (record->vartype)
{
case PGC_BOOL:
{
struct config_bool *conf = (struct config_bool *) record;
if (conf->show_hook)
val = (*conf->show_hook) ();
else
val = *conf->variable ? "on" : "off";
}
break;
case PGC_INT:
{
struct config_int *conf = (struct config_int *) record;
if (conf->show_hook)
val = (*conf->show_hook) ();
else
{
/*
* Use int64 arithmetic to avoid overflows in units
* conversion.
*/
int64 result = *conf->variable;
const char *unit;
if (use_units && result > 0 &&
(record->flags & GUC_UNIT_MEMORY))
{
switch (record->flags & GUC_UNIT_MEMORY)
{
case GUC_UNIT_BLOCKS:
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
result *= BLCKSZ / 1024;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_XBLOCKS:
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
result *= XLOG_BLCKSZ / 1024;
break;
}
if (result % KB_PER_GB == 0)
{
result /= KB_PER_GB;
unit = "GB";
}
else if (result % KB_PER_MB == 0)
{
result /= KB_PER_MB;
unit = "MB";
}
else
{
unit = "kB";
}
}
else if (use_units && result > 0 &&
(record->flags & GUC_UNIT_TIME))
{
switch (record->flags & GUC_UNIT_TIME)
{
case GUC_UNIT_S:
result *= MS_PER_S;
break;
case GUC_UNIT_MIN:
result *= MS_PER_MIN;
break;
}
if (result % MS_PER_D == 0)
{
result /= MS_PER_D;
unit = "d";
}
else if (result % MS_PER_H == 0)
{
result /= MS_PER_H;
unit = "h";
}
else if (result % MS_PER_MIN == 0)
{
result /= MS_PER_MIN;
unit = "min";
}
else if (result % MS_PER_S == 0)
{
result /= MS_PER_S;
unit = "s";
}
else
{
unit = "ms";
}
}
else
unit = "";
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), INT64_FORMAT "%s",
result, unit);
val = buffer;
}
}
break;
case PGC_REAL:
{
struct config_real *conf = (struct config_real *) record;
if (conf->show_hook)
val = (*conf->show_hook) ();
else
{
snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), "%g",
*conf->variable);
val = buffer;
}
}
break;
case PGC_STRING:
{
struct config_string *conf = (struct config_string *) record;
if (conf->show_hook)
val = (*conf->show_hook) ();
else if (*conf->variable && **conf->variable)
val = *conf->variable;
else
val = "";
}
break;
case PGC_ENUM:
{
struct config_enum *conf = (struct config_enum *) record;
if (conf->show_hook)
val = (*conf->show_hook) ();
else
val = config_enum_lookup_by_value(conf, *conf->variable);
}
break;
default:
/* just to keep compiler quiet */
val = "???";
break;
}
return pstrdup(val);
}
#ifdef EXEC_BACKEND
/*
* These routines dump out all non-default GUC options into a binary
* file that is read by all exec'ed backends. The format is:
*
* variable name, string, null terminated
* variable value, string, null terminated
* variable source, integer
* variable scontext, integer
*/
static void
write_one_nondefault_variable(FILE *fp, struct config_generic * gconf)
{
if (gconf->source == PGC_S_DEFAULT)
return;
fprintf(fp, "%s", gconf->name);
fputc(0, fp);
switch (gconf->vartype)
{
case PGC_BOOL:
{
struct config_bool *conf = (struct config_bool *) gconf;
if (*conf->variable)
fprintf(fp, "true");
else
fprintf(fp, "false");
}
break;
case PGC_INT:
{
struct config_int *conf = (struct config_int *) gconf;
fprintf(fp, "%d", *conf->variable);
}
break;
case PGC_REAL:
{
struct config_real *conf = (struct config_real *) gconf;
fprintf(fp, "%.17g", *conf->variable);
}
break;
case PGC_STRING:
{
struct config_string *conf = (struct config_string *) gconf;
fprintf(fp, "%s", *conf->variable);
}
break;
case PGC_ENUM:
{
struct config_enum *conf = (struct config_enum *) gconf;
fprintf(fp, "%s",
config_enum_lookup_by_value(conf, *conf->variable));
}
break;
}
fputc(0, fp);
fwrite(&gconf->source, 1, sizeof(gconf->source), fp);
fwrite(&gconf->scontext, 1, sizeof(gconf->scontext), fp);
}
void
write_nondefault_variables(GucContext context)
{
int elevel;
FILE *fp;
int i;
Assert(context == PGC_POSTMASTER || context == PGC_SIGHUP);
elevel = (context == PGC_SIGHUP) ? LOG : ERROR;
/*
* Open file
*/
fp = AllocateFile(CONFIG_EXEC_PARAMS_NEW, "w");
if (!fp)
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
errmsg("could not write to file \"%s\": %m",
CONFIG_EXEC_PARAMS_NEW)));
return;
}
for (i = 0; i < num_guc_variables; i++)
{
write_one_nondefault_variable(fp, guc_variables[i]);
}
if (FreeFile(fp))
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
errmsg("could not write to file \"%s\": %m",
CONFIG_EXEC_PARAMS_NEW)));
return;
}
/*
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
* Put new file in place. This could delay on Win32, but we don't hold
* any exclusive locks.
*/
rename(CONFIG_EXEC_PARAMS_NEW, CONFIG_EXEC_PARAMS);
}
/*
* Read string, including null byte from file
*
* Return NULL on EOF and nothing read
*/
static char *
read_string_with_null(FILE *fp)
{
int i = 0,
ch,
maxlen = 256;
char *str = NULL;
do
{
if ((ch = fgetc(fp)) == EOF)
{
if (i == 0)
return NULL;
else
elog(FATAL, "invalid format of exec config params file");
}
if (i == 0)
str = guc_malloc(FATAL, maxlen);
else if (i == maxlen)
str = guc_realloc(FATAL, str, maxlen *= 2);
str[i++] = ch;
} while (ch != 0);
return str;
}
/*
* This routine loads a previous postmaster dump of its non-default
* settings.
*/
void
read_nondefault_variables(void)
{
FILE *fp;
char *varname,
*varvalue;
GucSource varsource;
GucContext varscontext;
/*
* Open file
*/
fp = AllocateFile(CONFIG_EXEC_PARAMS, "r");
if (!fp)
{
/* File not found is fine */
if (errno != ENOENT)
ereport(FATAL,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
errmsg("could not read from file \"%s\": %m",
CONFIG_EXEC_PARAMS)));
return;
}
for (;;)
{
>> It certainly doesn't. There still was a bug with the locale stuff, >> though - the GUC variable was not set in the child >processes. So "show >> lc_collate" would *always* return "C", for example. attached >patch fixes >> this. > >Hm. Why were these vars not propagated by the regular >mechanism for GUC >variables (write_nondefault_variables or whatever it's called)? If the >problem is that it's not accepting PGC_INTERNAL values, then we need to >fix it there not here, because otherwise we'll have to pass all the >PGC_INTERNAL variables through the backend_variables file, which seems >like a recipe for more of the same sort of bug. Good point :-( I think the problem is not only that it specifically does not deal with PGC_INTERNAL variables. The problem is in the fact that write_nondefault_variables is called *before* the locale is read (because the locale is read from pg_control and not from any of the "usual" ways to read it). Attached patch is another stab at fixing it. It makes postmaster dump a new copy of the file once it has started the database (before it accepts any connections), which is when it will know about these parameters. Also updates the reading code to set the context to the one where the variable was originally set (PGC_POSTMASTER won't work for PGC_INTERNAL, and the other way around). We still pass lc_collate through the special file, because set_config_option on lc_collate will speficially *not* call setlocale(), and we need that call. But we no longer call set_config_option from there. Magnus Hagander
2004-06-11 05:54:54 +02:00
struct config_generic *record;
if ((varname = read_string_with_null(fp)) == NULL)
break;
if ((record = find_option(varname, true, FATAL)) == NULL)
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
elog(FATAL, "failed to locate variable %s in exec config params file", varname);
if ((varvalue = read_string_with_null(fp)) == NULL)
elog(FATAL, "invalid format of exec config params file");
if (fread(&varsource, 1, sizeof(varsource), fp) != sizeof(varsource))
elog(FATAL, "invalid format of exec config params file");
if (fread(&varscontext, 1, sizeof(varscontext), fp) != sizeof(varscontext))
elog(FATAL, "invalid format of exec config params file");
(void) set_config_option(varname, varvalue,
varscontext, varsource,
GUC_ACTION_SET, true);
free(varname);
free(varvalue);
}
FreeFile(fp);
}
2005-10-15 04:49:52 +02:00
#endif /* EXEC_BACKEND */
/*
* A little "long argument" simulation, although not quite GNU
* compliant. Takes a string of the form "some-option=some value" and
* returns name = "some_option" and value = "some value" in malloc'ed
* storage. Note that '-' is converted to '_' in the option name. If
* there is no '=' in the input string then value will be NULL.
*/
void
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
ParseLongOption(const char *string, char **name, char **value)
{
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
size_t equal_pos;
char *cp;
AssertArg(string);
AssertArg(name);
AssertArg(value);
equal_pos = strcspn(string, "=");
if (string[equal_pos] == '=')
{
*name = guc_malloc(FATAL, equal_pos + 1);
2007-02-07 01:52:35 +01:00
strlcpy(*name, string, equal_pos + 1);
*value = guc_strdup(FATAL, &string[equal_pos + 1]);
}
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
else
{
/* no equal sign in string */
*name = guc_strdup(FATAL, string);
*value = NULL;
}
2001-03-22 05:01:46 +01:00
for (cp = *name; *cp; cp++)
if (*cp == '-')
*cp = '_';
}
/*
* Handle options fetched from pg_db_role_setting.setconfig,
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
* pg_proc.proconfig, etc. Caller must specify proper context/source/action.
*
* The array parameter must be an array of TEXT (it must not be NULL).
*/
void
ProcessGUCArray(ArrayType *array,
GucContext context, GucSource source, GucAction action)
{
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
int i;
Assert(array != NULL);
Assert(ARR_ELEMTYPE(array) == TEXTOID);
Assert(ARR_NDIM(array) == 1);
Assert(ARR_LBOUND(array)[0] == 1);
for (i = 1; i <= ARR_DIMS(array)[0]; i++)
{
Datum d;
bool isnull;
char *s;
char *name;
char *value;
d = array_ref(array, 1, &i,
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
-1 /* varlenarray */ ,
-1 /* TEXT's typlen */ ,
false /* TEXT's typbyval */ ,
'i' /* TEXT's typalign */ ,
&isnull);
if (isnull)
continue;
s = TextDatumGetCString(d);
ParseLongOption(s, &name, &value);
if (!value)
{
ereport(WARNING,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
errmsg("could not parse setting for parameter \"%s\"",
name)));
free(name);
continue;
}
(void) set_config_option(name, value, context, source, action, true);
free(name);
if (value)
free(value);
pfree(s);
}
}
/*
* Add an entry to an option array. The array parameter may be NULL
* to indicate the current table entry is NULL.
*/
ArrayType *
GUCArrayAdd(ArrayType *array, const char *name, const char *value)
{
struct config_generic *record;
Datum datum;
char *newval;
ArrayType *a;
Assert(name);
Assert(value);
/* test if the option is valid and we're allowed to set it */
(void) validate_option_array_item(name, value, false);
/* normalize name (converts obsolete GUC names to modern spellings) */
record = find_option(name, false, WARNING);
if (record)
name = record->name;
/* build new item for array */
newval = palloc(strlen(name) + 1 + strlen(value) + 1);
sprintf(newval, "%s=%s", name, value);
datum = CStringGetTextDatum(newval);
if (array)
{
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
int index;
bool isnull;
int i;
Assert(ARR_ELEMTYPE(array) == TEXTOID);
Assert(ARR_NDIM(array) == 1);
Assert(ARR_LBOUND(array)[0] == 1);
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
index = ARR_DIMS(array)[0] + 1; /* add after end */
for (i = 1; i <= ARR_DIMS(array)[0]; i++)
{
Datum d;
char *current;
d = array_ref(array, 1, &i,
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
-1 /* varlenarray */ ,
-1 /* TEXT's typlen */ ,
false /* TEXT's typbyval */ ,
'i' /* TEXT's typalign */ ,
&isnull);
if (isnull)
continue;
current = TextDatumGetCString(d);
/* check for match up through and including '=' */
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
if (strncmp(current, newval, strlen(name) + 1) == 0)
{
index = i;
break;
}
}
a = array_set(array, 1, &index,
datum,
false,
-1 /* varlena array */ ,
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
-1 /* TEXT's typlen */ ,
false /* TEXT's typbyval */ ,
'i' /* TEXT's typalign */ );
}
else
a = construct_array(&datum, 1,
TEXTOID,
-1, false, 'i');
return a;
}
/*
* Delete an entry from an option array. The array parameter may be NULL
* to indicate the current table entry is NULL. Also, if the return value
* is NULL then a null should be stored.
*/
ArrayType *
GUCArrayDelete(ArrayType *array, const char *name)
{
struct config_generic *record;
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
ArrayType *newarray;
int i;
int index;
Assert(name);
/* test if the option is valid and we're allowed to set it */
(void) validate_option_array_item(name, NULL, false);
/* normalize name (converts obsolete GUC names to modern spellings) */
record = find_option(name, false, WARNING);
if (record)
name = record->name;
/* if array is currently null, then surely nothing to delete */
if (!array)
return NULL;
newarray = NULL;
index = 1;
for (i = 1; i <= ARR_DIMS(array)[0]; i++)
{
Datum d;
char *val;
bool isnull;
d = array_ref(array, 1, &i,
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
-1 /* varlenarray */ ,
-1 /* TEXT's typlen */ ,
false /* TEXT's typbyval */ ,
'i' /* TEXT's typalign */ ,
&isnull);
if (isnull)
continue;
val = TextDatumGetCString(d);
/* ignore entry if it's what we want to delete */
2002-09-04 22:31:48 +02:00
if (strncmp(val, name, strlen(name)) == 0
&& val[strlen(name)] == '=')
continue;
/* else add it to the output array */
if (newarray)
newarray = array_set(newarray, 1, &index,
d,
false,
-1 /* varlenarray */ ,
-1 /* TEXT's typlen */ ,
false /* TEXT's typbyval */ ,
'i' /* TEXT's typalign */ );
else
newarray = construct_array(&d, 1,
TEXTOID,
-1, false, 'i');
index++;
}
return newarray;
}
/*
* Given a GUC array, delete all settings from it that our permission
* level allows: if superuser, delete them all; if regular user, only
* those that are PGC_USERSET
*/
ArrayType *
GUCArrayReset(ArrayType *array)
{
ArrayType *newarray;
int i;
int index;
/* if array is currently null, nothing to do */
if (!array)
return NULL;
/* if we're superuser, we can delete everything, so just do it */
if (superuser())
return NULL;
newarray = NULL;
index = 1;
for (i = 1; i <= ARR_DIMS(array)[0]; i++)
{
Datum d;
char *val;
char *eqsgn;
bool isnull;
d = array_ref(array, 1, &i,
-1 /* varlenarray */ ,
-1 /* TEXT's typlen */ ,
false /* TEXT's typbyval */ ,
'i' /* TEXT's typalign */ ,
&isnull);
if (isnull)
continue;
val = TextDatumGetCString(d);
eqsgn = strchr(val, '=');
*eqsgn = '\0';
/* skip if we have permission to delete it */
if (validate_option_array_item(val, NULL, true))
continue;
/* else add it to the output array */
if (newarray)
newarray = array_set(newarray, 1, &index,
d,
false,
-1 /* varlenarray */ ,
-1 /* TEXT's typlen */ ,
false /* TEXT's typbyval */ ,
'i' /* TEXT's typalign */ );
else
newarray = construct_array(&d, 1,
TEXTOID,
-1, false, 'i');
index++;
pfree(val);
}
return newarray;
}
/*
* Validate a proposed option setting for GUCArrayAdd/Delete/Reset.
*
* name is the option name. value is the proposed value for the Add case,
2010-07-06 21:19:02 +02:00
* or NULL for the Delete/Reset cases. If skipIfNoPermissions is true, it's
* not an error to have no permissions to set the option.
*
* Returns TRUE if OK, FALSE if skipIfNoPermissions is true and user does not
* have permission to change this option (all other error cases result in an
* error being thrown).
*/
static bool
validate_option_array_item(const char *name, const char *value,
bool skipIfNoPermissions)
{
struct config_generic *gconf;
/*
* There are three cases to consider:
*
* name is a known GUC variable. Check the value normally, check
* permissions normally (ie, allow if variable is USERSET, or if it's
* SUSET and user is superuser).
*
* name is not known, but exists or can be created as a placeholder (i.e.,
* it has a prefixed name). We allow this case if you're a superuser,
* otherwise not. Superusers are assumed to know what they're doing.
* We can't allow it for other users, because when the placeholder is
* resolved it might turn out to be a SUSET variable;
* define_custom_variable assumes we checked that.
*
* name is not known and can't be created as a placeholder. Throw error,
* unless skipIfNoPermissions is true, in which case return FALSE.
*/
gconf = find_option(name, true, WARNING);
if (!gconf)
{
/* not known, failed to make a placeholder */
if (skipIfNoPermissions)
return false;
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
errmsg("unrecognized configuration parameter \"%s\"",
name)));
}
if (gconf->flags & GUC_CUSTOM_PLACEHOLDER)
{
/*
* We cannot do any meaningful check on the value, so only permissions
* are useful to check.
*/
if (superuser())
return true;
if (skipIfNoPermissions)
return false;
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
errmsg("permission denied to set parameter \"%s\"", name)));
}
/* manual permissions check so we can avoid an error being thrown */
if (gconf->context == PGC_USERSET)
2010-07-06 21:19:02 +02:00
/* ok */ ;
else if (gconf->context == PGC_SUSET && superuser())
2010-07-06 21:19:02 +02:00
/* ok */ ;
else if (skipIfNoPermissions)
return false;
/* if a permissions error should be thrown, let set_config_option do it */
/* test for permissions and valid option value */
Restructure error handling in reading of postgresql.conf. This patch has two distinct purposes: to report multiple problems in postgresql.conf rather than always bailing out after the first one, and to change the policy for whether changes are applied when there are unrelated errors in postgresql.conf. Formerly the policy was to apply no changes if any errors could be detected, but that had a significant consistency problem, because in some cases specific values might be seen as valid by some processes but invalid by others. This meant that the latter processes would fail to adopt changes in other parameters even though the former processes had done so. The new policy is that during SIGHUP, the file is rejected as a whole if there are any errors in the "name = value" syntax, or if any lines attempt to set nonexistent built-in parameters, or if any lines attempt to set custom parameters whose prefix is not listed in (the new value of) custom_variable_classes. These tests should always give the same results in all processes, and provide what seems a reasonably robust defense against loading values from badly corrupted config files. If these tests pass, all processes will apply all settings that they individually see as good, ignoring (but logging) any they don't. In addition, the postmaster does not abandon reading a configuration file after the first syntax error, but continues to read the file and report syntax errors (up to a maximum of 100 syntax errors per file). The postmaster will still refuse to start up if the configuration file contains any errors at startup time, but these changes allow multiple errors to be detected and reported before quitting. Alexey Klyukin, reviewed by Andy Colson and av (Alexander ?) with some additional hacking by Tom Lane
2011-10-02 22:50:04 +02:00
(void) set_config_option(name, value,
superuser() ? PGC_SUSET : PGC_USERSET,
PGC_S_TEST, GUC_ACTION_SET, false);
return true;
}
/*
* Called by check_hooks that want to override the normal
* ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE SQLSTATE for check hook failures.
*
* Note that GUC_check_errmsg() etc are just macros that result in a direct
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
* assignment to the associated variables. That is ugly, but forced by the
* limitations of C's macro mechanisms.
*/
void
GUC_check_errcode(int sqlerrcode)
{
GUC_check_errcode_value = sqlerrcode;
}
/*
* Convenience functions to manage calling a variable's check_hook.
* These mostly take care of the protocol for letting check hooks supply
* portions of the error report on failure.
*/
static bool
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
call_bool_check_hook(struct config_bool * conf, bool *newval, void **extra,
GucSource source, int elevel)
{
/* Quick success if no hook */
if (!conf->check_hook)
return true;
/* Reset variables that might be set by hook */
GUC_check_errcode_value = ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE;
GUC_check_errmsg_string = NULL;
GUC_check_errdetail_string = NULL;
GUC_check_errhint_string = NULL;
if (!(*conf->check_hook) (newval, extra, source))
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(GUC_check_errcode_value),
GUC_check_errmsg_string ?
errmsg_internal("%s", GUC_check_errmsg_string) :
errmsg("invalid value for parameter \"%s\": %d",
conf->gen.name, (int) *newval),
GUC_check_errdetail_string ?
errdetail_internal("%s", GUC_check_errdetail_string) : 0,
GUC_check_errhint_string ?
errhint("%s", GUC_check_errhint_string) : 0));
/* Flush any strings created in ErrorContext */
FlushErrorState();
return false;
}
return true;
}
static bool
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
call_int_check_hook(struct config_int * conf, int *newval, void **extra,
GucSource source, int elevel)
{
/* Quick success if no hook */
if (!conf->check_hook)
return true;
/* Reset variables that might be set by hook */
GUC_check_errcode_value = ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE;
GUC_check_errmsg_string = NULL;
GUC_check_errdetail_string = NULL;
GUC_check_errhint_string = NULL;
if (!(*conf->check_hook) (newval, extra, source))
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(GUC_check_errcode_value),
GUC_check_errmsg_string ?
errmsg_internal("%s", GUC_check_errmsg_string) :
errmsg("invalid value for parameter \"%s\": %d",
conf->gen.name, *newval),
GUC_check_errdetail_string ?
errdetail_internal("%s", GUC_check_errdetail_string) : 0,
GUC_check_errhint_string ?
errhint("%s", GUC_check_errhint_string) : 0));
/* Flush any strings created in ErrorContext */
FlushErrorState();
return false;
}
return true;
}
static bool
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
call_real_check_hook(struct config_real * conf, double *newval, void **extra,
GucSource source, int elevel)
{
/* Quick success if no hook */
if (!conf->check_hook)
return true;
/* Reset variables that might be set by hook */
GUC_check_errcode_value = ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE;
GUC_check_errmsg_string = NULL;
GUC_check_errdetail_string = NULL;
GUC_check_errhint_string = NULL;
if (!(*conf->check_hook) (newval, extra, source))
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(GUC_check_errcode_value),
GUC_check_errmsg_string ?
errmsg_internal("%s", GUC_check_errmsg_string) :
errmsg("invalid value for parameter \"%s\": %g",
conf->gen.name, *newval),
GUC_check_errdetail_string ?
errdetail_internal("%s", GUC_check_errdetail_string) : 0,
GUC_check_errhint_string ?
errhint("%s", GUC_check_errhint_string) : 0));
/* Flush any strings created in ErrorContext */
FlushErrorState();
return false;
}
return true;
}
static bool
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
call_string_check_hook(struct config_string * conf, char **newval, void **extra,
GucSource source, int elevel)
{
/* Quick success if no hook */
if (!conf->check_hook)
return true;
/* Reset variables that might be set by hook */
GUC_check_errcode_value = ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE;
GUC_check_errmsg_string = NULL;
GUC_check_errdetail_string = NULL;
GUC_check_errhint_string = NULL;
if (!(*conf->check_hook) (newval, extra, source))
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(GUC_check_errcode_value),
GUC_check_errmsg_string ?
errmsg_internal("%s", GUC_check_errmsg_string) :
errmsg("invalid value for parameter \"%s\": \"%s\"",
conf->gen.name, *newval ? *newval : ""),
GUC_check_errdetail_string ?
errdetail_internal("%s", GUC_check_errdetail_string) : 0,
GUC_check_errhint_string ?
errhint("%s", GUC_check_errhint_string) : 0));
/* Flush any strings created in ErrorContext */
FlushErrorState();
return false;
}
return true;
}
static bool
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
call_enum_check_hook(struct config_enum * conf, int *newval, void **extra,
GucSource source, int elevel)
{
/* Quick success if no hook */
if (!conf->check_hook)
return true;
/* Reset variables that might be set by hook */
GUC_check_errcode_value = ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE;
GUC_check_errmsg_string = NULL;
GUC_check_errdetail_string = NULL;
GUC_check_errhint_string = NULL;
if (!(*conf->check_hook) (newval, extra, source))
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(GUC_check_errcode_value),
GUC_check_errmsg_string ?
errmsg_internal("%s", GUC_check_errmsg_string) :
errmsg("invalid value for parameter \"%s\": \"%s\"",
conf->gen.name,
config_enum_lookup_by_value(conf, *newval)),
GUC_check_errdetail_string ?
errdetail_internal("%s", GUC_check_errdetail_string) : 0,
GUC_check_errhint_string ?
errhint("%s", GUC_check_errhint_string) : 0));
/* Flush any strings created in ErrorContext */
FlushErrorState();
return false;
}
return true;
}
/*
* check_hook, assign_hook and show_hook subroutines
*/
static bool
check_log_destination(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
char *rawstring;
List *elemlist;
ListCell *l;
int newlogdest = 0;
int *myextra;
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
/* Need a modifiable copy of string */
rawstring = pstrdup(*newval);
/* Parse string into list of identifiers */
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
if (!SplitIdentifierString(rawstring, ',', &elemlist))
{
/* syntax error in list */
GUC_check_errdetail("List syntax is invalid.");
pfree(rawstring);
list_free(elemlist);
return false;
}
foreach(l, elemlist)
{
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
char *tok = (char *) lfirst(l);
if (pg_strcasecmp(tok, "stderr") == 0)
newlogdest |= LOG_DESTINATION_STDERR;
else if (pg_strcasecmp(tok, "csvlog") == 0)
2007-11-15 22:14:46 +01:00
newlogdest |= LOG_DESTINATION_CSVLOG;
#ifdef HAVE_SYSLOG
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
else if (pg_strcasecmp(tok, "syslog") == 0)
newlogdest |= LOG_DESTINATION_SYSLOG;
#endif
#ifdef WIN32
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
else if (pg_strcasecmp(tok, "eventlog") == 0)
newlogdest |= LOG_DESTINATION_EVENTLOG;
#endif
2004-08-29 07:07:03 +02:00
else
{
GUC_check_errdetail("Unrecognized key word: \"%s\".", tok);
pfree(rawstring);
list_free(elemlist);
return false;
}
}
pfree(rawstring);
list_free(elemlist);
myextra = (int *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(int));
*myextra = newlogdest;
*extra = (void *) myextra;
return true;
}
static void
assign_log_destination(const char *newval, void *extra)
{
Log_destination = *((int *) extra);
}
static void
assign_syslog_facility(int newval, void *extra)
{
#ifdef HAVE_SYSLOG
set_syslog_parameters(syslog_ident_str ? syslog_ident_str : "postgres",
newval);
#endif
/* Without syslog support, just ignore it */
}
static void
assign_syslog_ident(const char *newval, void *extra)
{
#ifdef HAVE_SYSLOG
set_syslog_parameters(newval, syslog_facility);
#endif
/* Without syslog support, it will always be set to "none", so ignore */
}
static void
assign_session_replication_role(int newval, void *extra)
Changes pg_trigger and extend pg_rewrite in order to allow triggers and rules to be defined with different, per session controllable, behaviors for replication purposes. This will allow replication systems like Slony-I and, as has been stated on pgsql-hackers, other products to control the firing mechanism of triggers and rewrite rules without modifying the system catalog directly. The firing mechanisms are controlled by a new superuser-only GUC variable, session_replication_role, together with a change to pg_trigger.tgenabled and a new column pg_rewrite.ev_enabled. Both columns are a single char data type now (tgenabled was a bool before). The possible values in these attributes are: 'O' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "origin" (default) or "local". This is the default behavior. 'D' - Trigger/Rule is disabled and fires never 'A' - Trigger/Rule fires always regardless of the setting of session_replication_role 'R' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "replica" The GUC variable can only be changed as long as the system does not have any cached query plans. This will prevent changing the session role and accidentally executing stored procedures or functions that have plans cached that expand to the wrong query set due to differences in the rule firing semantics. The SQL syntax for changing a triggers/rules firing semantics is ALTER TABLE <tabname> <when> TRIGGER|RULE <name>; <when> ::= ENABLE | ENABLE ALWAYS | ENABLE REPLICA | DISABLE psql's \d command as well as pg_dump are extended in a backward compatible fashion. Jan
2007-03-20 00:38:32 +01:00
{
/*
* Must flush the plan cache when changing replication role; but don't
* flush unnecessarily.
*/
if (SessionReplicationRole != newval)
ResetPlanCache();
Changes pg_trigger and extend pg_rewrite in order to allow triggers and rules to be defined with different, per session controllable, behaviors for replication purposes. This will allow replication systems like Slony-I and, as has been stated on pgsql-hackers, other products to control the firing mechanism of triggers and rewrite rules without modifying the system catalog directly. The firing mechanisms are controlled by a new superuser-only GUC variable, session_replication_role, together with a change to pg_trigger.tgenabled and a new column pg_rewrite.ev_enabled. Both columns are a single char data type now (tgenabled was a bool before). The possible values in these attributes are: 'O' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "origin" (default) or "local". This is the default behavior. 'D' - Trigger/Rule is disabled and fires never 'A' - Trigger/Rule fires always regardless of the setting of session_replication_role 'R' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "replica" The GUC variable can only be changed as long as the system does not have any cached query plans. This will prevent changing the session role and accidentally executing stored procedures or functions that have plans cached that expand to the wrong query set due to differences in the rule firing semantics. The SQL syntax for changing a triggers/rules firing semantics is ALTER TABLE <tabname> <when> TRIGGER|RULE <name>; <when> ::= ENABLE | ENABLE ALWAYS | ENABLE REPLICA | DISABLE psql's \d command as well as pg_dump are extended in a backward compatible fashion. Jan
2007-03-20 00:38:32 +01:00
}
static bool
check_temp_buffers(int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
/*
* Once local buffers have been initialized, it's too late to change this.
*/
if (NLocBuffer && NLocBuffer != *newval)
{
GUC_check_errdetail("\"temp_buffers\" cannot be changed after any temporary tables have been accessed in the session.");
return false;
}
return true;
}
static bool
check_phony_autocommit(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
if (!*newval)
{
GUC_check_errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED);
GUC_check_errmsg("SET AUTOCOMMIT TO OFF is no longer supported");
return false;
}
return true;
}
static bool
check_debug_assertions(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
#ifndef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING
if (*newval)
{
GUC_check_errmsg("assertion checking is not supported by this build");
return false;
}
#endif
return true;
}
static bool
check_bonjour(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
#ifndef USE_BONJOUR
if (*newval)
{
GUC_check_errmsg("Bonjour is not supported by this build");
return false;
}
#endif
return true;
}
static bool
check_ssl(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
#ifndef USE_SSL
if (*newval)
{
GUC_check_errmsg("SSL is not supported by this build");
return false;
}
#endif
return true;
}
static bool
check_stage_log_stats(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
if (*newval && log_statement_stats)
{
GUC_check_errdetail("Cannot enable parameter when \"log_statement_stats\" is true.");
return false;
}
return true;
}
static bool
check_log_stats(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
if (*newval &&
(log_parser_stats || log_planner_stats || log_executor_stats))
{
GUC_check_errdetail("Cannot enable \"log_statement_stats\" when "
"\"log_parser_stats\", \"log_planner_stats\", "
"or \"log_executor_stats\" is true.");
return false;
}
return true;
}
static bool
check_canonical_path(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
/*
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
* Since canonicalize_path never enlarges the string, we can just modify
* newval in-place. But watch out for NULL, which is the default value
* for external_pid_file.
*/
if (*newval)
canonicalize_path(*newval);
return true;
}
static bool
check_timezone_abbreviations(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
/*
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
* The boot_val given above for timezone_abbreviations is NULL. When we
* see this we just do nothing. If this value isn't overridden from the
* config file then pg_timezone_abbrev_initialize() will eventually
* replace it with "Default". This hack has two purposes: to avoid
* wasting cycles loading values that might soon be overridden from the
* config file, and to avoid trying to read the timezone abbrev files
2006-10-04 02:30:14 +02:00
* during InitializeGUCOptions(). The latter doesn't work in an
* EXEC_BACKEND subprocess because my_exec_path hasn't been set yet and so
* we can't locate PGSHAREDIR.
*/
if (*newval == NULL)
{
Assert(source == PGC_S_DEFAULT);
return true;
}
/* OK, load the file and produce a malloc'd TimeZoneAbbrevTable */
*extra = load_tzoffsets(*newval);
/* tzparser.c returns NULL on failure, reporting via GUC_check_errmsg */
if (!*extra)
return false;
return true;
}
static void
assign_timezone_abbreviations(const char *newval, void *extra)
{
/* Do nothing for the boot_val default of NULL */
if (!extra)
return;
InstallTimeZoneAbbrevs((TimeZoneAbbrevTable *) extra);
}
/*
* pg_timezone_abbrev_initialize --- set default value if not done already
*
* This is called after initial loading of postgresql.conf. If no
* timezone_abbreviations setting was found therein, select default.
Split PGC_S_DEFAULT into two values, for true boot_val vs computed default. Failure to distinguish these cases is the real cause behind the recent reports of Windows builds crashing on 'infinity'::timestamp, which was directly due to failure to establish a value of timezone_abbreviations in postmaster child processes. The postmaster had the desired value, but write_one_nondefault_variable() didn't transmit it to backends. To fix that, invent a new value PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT, and be sure to use that or PGC_S_ENV_VAR (as appropriate) for "default" settings that are computed during initialization. (We need both because there's at least one variable that could receive a value from either source.) This commit also fixes ProcessConfigFile's failure to restore the correct default value for certain GUC variables if they are set in postgresql.conf and then removed/commented out of the file. We have to recompute and reinstall the value for any GUC variable that could have received a value from PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT or PGC_S_ENV_VAR sources, and there were a number of oversights. (That whole thing is a crock that needs to be redesigned, but not today.) However, I intentionally didn't make it work "exactly right" for the cases of timezone and log_timezone. The exactly right behavior would involve running select_default_timezone, which we'd have to do independently in each postgres process, causing the whole database to become entirely unresponsive for as much as several seconds. That didn't seem like a good idea, especially since the variable's removal from postgresql.conf might be just an accidental edit. Instead the behavior is to adopt the previously active setting as if it were default. Note that this patch creates an ABI break for extensions that use any of the PGC_S_XXX constants; they'll need to be recompiled.
2011-05-12 01:57:38 +02:00
* If a non-default value is already installed, nothing will happen.
*
* This can also be called from ProcessConfigFile to establish the default
* value after a postgresql.conf entry for it is removed.
*/
static void
pg_timezone_abbrev_initialize(void)
{
Split PGC_S_DEFAULT into two values, for true boot_val vs computed default. Failure to distinguish these cases is the real cause behind the recent reports of Windows builds crashing on 'infinity'::timestamp, which was directly due to failure to establish a value of timezone_abbreviations in postmaster child processes. The postmaster had the desired value, but write_one_nondefault_variable() didn't transmit it to backends. To fix that, invent a new value PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT, and be sure to use that or PGC_S_ENV_VAR (as appropriate) for "default" settings that are computed during initialization. (We need both because there's at least one variable that could receive a value from either source.) This commit also fixes ProcessConfigFile's failure to restore the correct default value for certain GUC variables if they are set in postgresql.conf and then removed/commented out of the file. We have to recompute and reinstall the value for any GUC variable that could have received a value from PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT or PGC_S_ENV_VAR sources, and there were a number of oversights. (That whole thing is a crock that needs to be redesigned, but not today.) However, I intentionally didn't make it work "exactly right" for the cases of timezone and log_timezone. The exactly right behavior would involve running select_default_timezone, which we'd have to do independently in each postgres process, causing the whole database to become entirely unresponsive for as much as several seconds. That didn't seem like a good idea, especially since the variable's removal from postgresql.conf might be just an accidental edit. Instead the behavior is to adopt the previously active setting as if it were default. Note that this patch creates an ABI break for extensions that use any of the PGC_S_XXX constants; they'll need to be recompiled.
2011-05-12 01:57:38 +02:00
SetConfigOption("timezone_abbreviations", "Default",
PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT);
}
static const char *
show_archive_command(void)
{
if (XLogArchivingActive())
return XLogArchiveCommand;
else
return "(disabled)";
}
static void
assign_tcp_keepalives_idle(int newval, void *extra)
{
/*
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
* The kernel API provides no way to test a value without setting it; and
* once we set it we might fail to unset it. So there seems little point
* in fully implementing the check-then-assign GUC API for these
* variables. Instead we just do the assignment on demand. pqcomm.c
* reports any problems via elog(LOG).
*
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
* This approach means that the GUC value might have little to do with the
* actual kernel value, so we use a show_hook that retrieves the kernel
* value rather than trusting GUC's copy.
*/
(void) pq_setkeepalivesidle(newval, MyProcPort);
}
static const char *
show_tcp_keepalives_idle(void)
{
/* See comments in assign_tcp_keepalives_idle */
static char nbuf[16];
snprintf(nbuf, sizeof(nbuf), "%d", pq_getkeepalivesidle(MyProcPort));
return nbuf;
}
static void
assign_tcp_keepalives_interval(int newval, void *extra)
{
/* See comments in assign_tcp_keepalives_idle */
(void) pq_setkeepalivesinterval(newval, MyProcPort);
}
static const char *
show_tcp_keepalives_interval(void)
{
/* See comments in assign_tcp_keepalives_idle */
static char nbuf[16];
snprintf(nbuf, sizeof(nbuf), "%d", pq_getkeepalivesinterval(MyProcPort));
return nbuf;
}
static void
assign_tcp_keepalives_count(int newval, void *extra)
{
/* See comments in assign_tcp_keepalives_idle */
(void) pq_setkeepalivescount(newval, MyProcPort);
}
static const char *
show_tcp_keepalives_count(void)
{
/* See comments in assign_tcp_keepalives_idle */
static char nbuf[16];
snprintf(nbuf, sizeof(nbuf), "%d", pq_getkeepalivescount(MyProcPort));
return nbuf;
}
static bool
check_maxconnections(int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
if (*newval + autovacuum_max_workers + 1 > MAX_BACKENDS)
return false;
return true;
}
static void
assign_maxconnections(int newval, void *extra)
{
MaxBackends = newval + autovacuum_max_workers + 1;
}
static bool
check_autovacuum_max_workers(int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
if (MaxConnections + *newval + 1 > MAX_BACKENDS)
return false;
return true;
}
static void
assign_autovacuum_max_workers(int newval, void *extra)
{
MaxBackends = MaxConnections + newval + 1;
}
static bool
check_effective_io_concurrency(int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
#ifdef USE_PREFETCH
double new_prefetch_pages = 0.0;
int i;
/*----------
* The user-visible GUC parameter is the number of drives (spindles),
* which we need to translate to a number-of-pages-to-prefetch target.
* The target value is stashed in *extra and then assigned to the actual
* variable by assign_effective_io_concurrency.
*
* The expected number of prefetch pages needed to keep N drives busy is:
*
* drives | I/O requests
* -------+----------------
* 1 | 1
* 2 | 2/1 + 2/2 = 3
* 3 | 3/1 + 3/2 + 3/3 = 5 1/2
* 4 | 4/1 + 4/2 + 4/3 + 4/4 = 8 1/3
* n | n * H(n)
*
* This is called the "coupon collector problem" and H(n) is called the
* harmonic series. This could be approximated by n * ln(n), but for
* reasonable numbers of drives we might as well just compute the series.
*
* Alternatively we could set the target to the number of pages necessary
* so that the expected number of active spindles is some arbitrary
* percentage of the total. This sounds the same but is actually slightly
* different. The result ends up being ln(1-P)/ln((n-1)/n) where P is
* that desired fraction.
*
* Experimental results show that both of these formulas aren't aggressive
* enough, but we don't really have any better proposals.
*
* Note that if *newval = 0 (disabled), we must set target = 0.
*----------
*/
for (i = 1; i <= *newval; i++)
new_prefetch_pages += (double) *newval / (double) i;
/* This range check shouldn't fail, but let's be paranoid */
if (new_prefetch_pages >= 0.0 && new_prefetch_pages < (double) INT_MAX)
{
2011-04-10 17:42:00 +02:00
int *myextra = (int *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(int));
*myextra = (int) rint(new_prefetch_pages);
*extra = (void *) myextra;
return true;
}
else
return false;
#else
return true;
#endif /* USE_PREFETCH */
}
static void
assign_effective_io_concurrency(int newval, void *extra)
{
#ifdef USE_PREFETCH
target_prefetch_pages = *((int *) extra);
#endif /* USE_PREFETCH */
}
static void
assign_pgstat_temp_directory(const char *newval, void *extra)
{
/* check_canonical_path already canonicalized newval for us */
char *tname;
char *fname;
tname = guc_malloc(ERROR, strlen(newval) + 12); /* /pgstat.tmp */
sprintf(tname, "%s/pgstat.tmp", newval);
fname = guc_malloc(ERROR, strlen(newval) + 13); /* /pgstat.stat */
sprintf(fname, "%s/pgstat.stat", newval);
if (pgstat_stat_tmpname)
free(pgstat_stat_tmpname);
pgstat_stat_tmpname = tname;
if (pgstat_stat_filename)
free(pgstat_stat_filename);
pgstat_stat_filename = fname;
}
static bool
check_application_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
{
/* Only allow clean ASCII chars in the application name */
char *p;
for (p = *newval; *p; p++)
{
if (*p < 32 || *p > 126)
*p = '?';
}
return true;
}
static void
assign_application_name(const char *newval, void *extra)
{
/* Update the pg_stat_activity view */
pgstat_report_appname(newval);
}
static const char *
show_unix_socket_permissions(void)
{
static char buf[8];
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%04o", Unix_socket_permissions);
return buf;
}
static const char *
show_log_file_mode(void)
{
static char buf[8];
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%04o", Log_file_mode);
return buf;
}
#include "guc-file.c"